]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blame - gcc/tm.texi
Oops, missed ChangeLog in last checkin...
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / tm.texi
CommitLineData
fed3cef0
RK
1@c Copyright (C) 1988,1989,1992,1993,1994,1995,1996,1997,1998,1999,2000
2@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
feca2ed3
JW
3@c This is part of the GCC manual.
4@c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
5
6@node Target Macros
7@chapter Target Description Macros
8@cindex machine description macros
9@cindex target description macros
10@cindex macros, target description
11@cindex @file{tm.h} macros
12
13In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
14includes a C header file conventionally given the name
15@file{@var{machine}.h}. This header file defines numerous macros
16that convey the information about the target machine that does not fit
17into the scheme of the @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be
18a link to @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h}
19includes @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include
20@file{config.h}.
21
22@menu
23* Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
24* Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}.
25* Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
26* Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
27* Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
28* Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
29* Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
30* Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
31* Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
32* Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
33* Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
34* Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
35* Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
36* Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
37* PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
38* Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
39* Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
40* Cross-compilation:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
9f09b1f2 41* Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
feca2ed3
JW
42* Misc:: Everything else.
43@end menu
44
45@node Driver
46@section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
47@cindex driver
48@cindex controlling the compilation driver
49
50@c prevent bad page break with this line
51You can control the compilation driver.
52
53@table @code
54@findex SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
55@item SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{char})
56A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
57takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
58option takes--zero, for many options.
59
60By default, this macro is defined as
61@code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
62properly. You need not define @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
63wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
64should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
65additional options.
66
67@findex WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
68@item WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{name})
69A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{name}}
70takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
71option takes--zero, for many options. This macro rather than
72@code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} is used for multi-character option names.
73
74By default, this macro is defined as
75@code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
76properly. You need not define @code{WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
77wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
78should call @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
79additional options.
80
88117d44
NC
81@findex SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION
82@item SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION (@var{char})
83A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
84stops compilation before the generation of an executable. The value is
85boolean, non-zero if the option does stop an executable from being
86generated, zero otherwise.
87
88By default, this macro is defined as
89@code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION}, which handles the standard
90options properly. You need not define
91@code{SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} unless you wish to add additional
92options which affect the generation of an executable. Any redefinition
93should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} and then check
94for additional options.
95
feca2ed3
JW
96@findex SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
97@item SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
98A string-valued C expression which enumerates the options for which
99the linker needs a space between the option and its argument.
100
101If this macro is not defined, the default value is @code{""}.
102
103@findex CPP_SPEC
104@item CPP_SPEC
a3a15b4d 105A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
feca2ed3 106pass to CPP. It can also specify how to translate options you
a3a15b4d 107give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP.
feca2ed3
JW
108
109Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
110
111@findex NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
112@item NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
113If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
114@code{__SIZE_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__SIZE_TYPE__} must then be defined
115by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
116
117This should be defined if @code{SIZE_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
118which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
119be defined.
120
121@findex NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
122@item NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
123If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
124@code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__} must then be
125defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
126
127This should be defined if @code{PTRDIFF_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
128which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
0209c340
ZW
129be defined.
130
131@findex NO_BUILTIN_WCHAR_TYPE
132@item NO_BUILTIN_WCHAR_TYPE
133If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
134@code{__WCHAR_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__WCHAR_TYPE__} must then be
135defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
136
137This should be defined if @code{WCHAR_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
138which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
feca2ed3
JW
139be defined.
140
141@findex SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
142@item SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
a3a15b4d 143A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
feca2ed3
JW
144pass to CPP. By default, this macro is defined to pass the option
145@samp{-D__CHAR_UNSIGNED__} to CPP if @code{char} will be treated as
146@code{unsigned char} by @code{cc1}.
147
148Do not define this macro unless you need to override the default
149definition.
150
151@findex CC1_SPEC
152@item CC1_SPEC
a3a15b4d 153A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
66519c70
JL
154pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
155front ends.
a3a15b4d
JL
156It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
157for GCC to pass to front ends..
feca2ed3
JW
158
159Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160
161@findex CC1PLUS_SPEC
162@item CC1PLUS_SPEC
a3a15b4d 163A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
feca2ed3 164pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
a3a15b4d 165give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
feca2ed3
JW
166
167Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
1d96e5b4
FF
168Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
169@code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
170CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC.
feca2ed3
JW
171
172@findex ASM_SPEC
173@item ASM_SPEC
a3a15b4d 174A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
feca2ed3 175pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
a3a15b4d 176you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
feca2ed3
JW
177See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
178
179Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
180
181@findex ASM_FINAL_SPEC
182@item ASM_FINAL_SPEC
a3a15b4d 183A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
feca2ed3
JW
184run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
185Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
186an example of this.
187
188Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
189
190@findex LINK_SPEC
191@item LINK_SPEC
a3a15b4d 192A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
feca2ed3 193pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
a3a15b4d 194give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
feca2ed3
JW
195
196Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
197
198@findex LIB_SPEC
199@item LIB_SPEC
200Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
201between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
202command given to the linker.
203
204If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
205loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
206
207@findex LIBGCC_SPEC
208@item LIBGCC_SPEC
a3a15b4d 209Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
feca2ed3
JW
210how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
211linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
212the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
213
a3a15b4d 214If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
feca2ed3
JW
215passes the string @samp{-lgcc} to the linker unless the @samp{-shared}
216option is specified.
217
218@findex STARTFILE_SPEC
219@item STARTFILE_SPEC
220Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
221difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
222the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
223
224If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
225standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
226
227@findex ENDFILE_SPEC
228@item ENDFILE_SPEC
229Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
230difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
231the very end of the command given to the linker.
232
233Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
234
235@findex EXTRA_SPECS
236@item EXTRA_SPECS
237Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
238@file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
239@code{CC1_SPEC}.
240
241The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
242containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
243string constant that provides the specification.
244
245Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
246
247@code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
248related targets, which have various @code{..._SPECS} which are similar
249to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
250these definitions.
251
252For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
253define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
254used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
255used.
256
257The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
258
259@example
260#define EXTRA_SPECS \
261 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
262
263#define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
264@end example
265
266The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
267@smallexample
268#undef CPP_SPEC
269#define CPP_SPEC \
270"%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
271%@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} %@{mcall-aix: -D_CALL_AIX @} \
272%@{!mcall-sysv: %@{!mcall-aix: %(cpp_sysv_default) @}@} \
273%@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
274
275#undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
276#define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
277@end smallexample
278
279while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
280@code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
281
282@smallexample
283#undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
284#define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
285@end smallexample
286
287@findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
288@item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
289Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
290@file{libgcc.a} itself and should not pass @samp{-L} options to the
291linker. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
292the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search and will
293pass @samp{-L} options to it.
294
295@findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
296@item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
297Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
298@file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
299the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
300This macro is similar to @code{LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL}, except that it does
301not affect @samp{-L} options.
302
9ec36da5
JL
303@findex LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
304@item LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
305A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
306linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
307change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
308define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
309line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
310the effect you need.
311
feca2ed3
JW
312@findex MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
313@item MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
314Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
315string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
316target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
317@code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
318
319Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
320the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
321@code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
322@xref{Target Fragment}.
323
324@findex RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
325@item RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
326Define this macro to tell @code{gcc} that it should only translate
327a @samp{-B} prefix into a @samp{-L} linker option if the prefix
328indicates an absolute file name.
329
330@findex STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
331@item STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
332Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
333standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/gcc-lib/} as the default prefix to
334try when searching for the executable files of the compiler.
335
336@findex MD_EXEC_PREFIX
337@item MD_EXEC_PREFIX
338If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
339@code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
340when the @samp{-b} option is used, or the compiler is built as a cross
5505263f
JL
341compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
342to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.in}.
feca2ed3
JW
343
344@findex STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
345@item STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
346Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
347standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/} as the default prefix to
348try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
349
350@findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
351@item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
352If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
353standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
354@samp{-b} option is used, or when the compiler is built as a cross
355compiler.
356
357@findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
358@item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
359If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
360standard prefixes. It is not searched when the @samp{-b} option is
361used, or when the compiler is built as a cross compiler.
362
363@findex INIT_ENVIRONMENT
364@item INIT_ENVIRONMENT
e9a25f70 365Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
feca2ed3
JW
366variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
367loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
368initialize the necessary environment variables.
369
370@findex LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
371@item LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
372Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
373standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
374try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
375comes before @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
376
377Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
378@file{/usr/local/include} or its replacement.
379
380@findex SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
381@item SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
382Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to specify a
383system-specific directory to search for header files before the standard
384directory. @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} comes before
385@code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
386
387Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search the directory
388specified.
389
390@findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
391@item STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
392Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
393standard choice of @file{/usr/include} as the default prefix to
394try when searching for header files.
395
396Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
397@file{/usr/include} or its replacement.
398
e9a25f70
JL
399@findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
400@item STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
401The ``component'' corresponding to @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}.
402See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
403If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
404
feca2ed3
JW
405@findex INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
406@item INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
407Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
e9a25f70
JL
408for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
409usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
feca2ed3
JW
410@code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
411@code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
412and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
413and specify private search areas for GCC. The directory
414@code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
415
416The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
e9a25f70 417Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
9f6dc500
HPN
418string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
419for C++-only directories,
e9a25f70
JL
420and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
421wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
422the array with a null element.
423
424The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
425if any, in all upper-case letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
9f6dc500 426or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
e9a25f70
JL
427operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
428
e9a25f70 429For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
feca2ed3
JW
430
431@example
432#define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
433@{ \
e9a25f70
JL
434 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
435 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
436 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
437 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
438 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
feca2ed3
JW
439@}
440@end example
441@end table
442
443Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
444
445@enumerate
446@item
447Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
448
449@item
450The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
451
452@item
453The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
454
455@item
456The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
457
458@item
459@file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
460
461@item
462The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
463@end enumerate
464
465Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
466
467@enumerate
468@item
469Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
470
471@item
472The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
473
474@item
475The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
512b62fb 476(or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
feca2ed3
JW
477
478@item
479The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
480
481@item
482@file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
483
484@item
485The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
486
487@item
488The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if any.
489
490@item
491The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}.
492
493@item
494@file{/lib/}.
495
496@item
497@file{/usr/lib/}.
498@end enumerate
499
500@node Run-time Target
501@section Run-time Target Specification
502@cindex run-time target specification
503@cindex predefined macros
504@cindex target specifications
505
506@c prevent bad page break with this line
507Here are run-time target specifications.
508
509@table @code
510@findex CPP_PREDEFINES
511@item CPP_PREDEFINES
512Define this to be a string constant containing @samp{-D} options to
513define the predefined macros that identify this machine and system.
514These macros will be predefined unless the @samp{-ansi} option is
515specified.
516
517In addition, a parallel set of macros are predefined, whose names are
518made by appending @samp{__} at the beginning and at the end. These
519@samp{__} macros are permitted by the ANSI standard, so they are
520predefined regardless of whether @samp{-ansi} is specified.
521
522For example, on the Sun, one can use the following value:
523
524@smallexample
525"-Dmc68000 -Dsun -Dunix"
526@end smallexample
527
528The result is to define the macros @code{__mc68000__}, @code{__sun__}
529and @code{__unix__} unconditionally, and the macros @code{mc68000},
530@code{sun} and @code{unix} provided @samp{-ansi} is not specified.
531
532@findex extern int target_flags
533@item extern int target_flags;
534This declaration should be present.
535
536@cindex optional hardware or system features
537@cindex features, optional, in system conventions
538@item TARGET_@dots{}
539This series of macros is to allow compiler command arguments to
540enable or disable the use of optional features of the target machine.
541For example, one machine description serves both the 68000 and
542the 68020; a command argument tells the compiler whether it should
543use 68020-only instructions or not. This command argument works
544by means of a macro @code{TARGET_68020} that tests a bit in
545@code{target_flags}.
546
547Define a macro @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} for each such option.
9f6dc500
HPN
548Its definition should test a bit in @code{target_flags}. It is
549recommended that a helper macro @code{TARGET_MASK_@var{featurename}}
550is defined for each bit-value to test, and used in
551@code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} and @code{TARGET_SWITCHES}. For
552example:
feca2ed3
JW
553
554@smallexample
9f6dc500
HPN
555#define TARGET_MASK_68020 1
556#define TARGET_68020 (target_flags & TARGET_MASK_68020)
feca2ed3
JW
557@end smallexample
558
559One place where these macros are used is in the condition-expressions
560of instruction patterns. Note how @code{TARGET_68020} appears
561frequently in the 68000 machine description file, @file{m68k.md}.
562Another place they are used is in the definitions of the other
563macros in the @file{@var{machine}.h} file.
564
565@findex TARGET_SWITCHES
566@item TARGET_SWITCHES
567This macro defines names of command options to set and clear
568bits in @code{target_flags}. Its definition is an initializer
569with a subgrouping for each command option.
570
571Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the option
b8468bc7
NC
572name, a number, which contains the bits to set in
573@code{target_flags}, and a second string which is the description
574displayed by --help. If the number is negative then the bits specified
575by the number are cleared instead of being set. If the description
576string is present but empty, then no help information will be displayed
577for that option, but it will not count as an undocumented option. The
578actual option name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
feca2ed3
JW
579
580One of the subgroupings should have a null string. The number in
581this grouping is the default value for @code{target_flags}. Any
582target options act starting with that value.
583
584Here is an example which defines @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}
585with opposite meanings, and picks the latter as the default:
586
587@smallexample
588#define TARGET_SWITCHES \
9f6dc500
HPN
589 @{ @{ "68020", TARGET_MASK_68020, "" @}, \
590 @{ "68000", -TARGET_MASK_68020, "Compile for the 68000" @}, \
591 @{ "", TARGET_MASK_68020, "" @}@}
feca2ed3
JW
592@end smallexample
593
594@findex TARGET_OPTIONS
595@item TARGET_OPTIONS
596This macro is similar to @code{TARGET_SWITCHES} but defines names of command
597options that have values. Its definition is an initializer with a
598subgrouping for each command option.
599
600Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the fixed part
b8468bc7
NC
601of the option name, the address of a variable, and a description string.
602The variable, type @code{char *}, is set to the variable part of the
603given option if the fixed part matches. The actual option name is made
604by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
feca2ed3
JW
605
606Here is an example which defines @samp{-mshort-data-@var{number}}. If the
607given option is @samp{-mshort-data-512}, the variable @code{m88k_short_data}
608will be set to the string @code{"512"}.
609
610@smallexample
611extern char *m88k_short_data;
612#define TARGET_OPTIONS \
b8468bc7 613 @{ @{ "short-data-", &m88k_short_data, "Specify the size of the short data section" @} @}
feca2ed3
JW
614@end smallexample
615
616@findex TARGET_VERSION
617@item TARGET_VERSION
618This macro is a C statement to print on @code{stderr} a string
619describing the particular machine description choice. Every machine
620description should define @code{TARGET_VERSION}. For example:
621
622@smallexample
623#ifdef MOTOROLA
624#define TARGET_VERSION \
625 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, Motorola syntax)");
626#else
627#define TARGET_VERSION \
628 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, MIT syntax)");
629#endif
630@end smallexample
631
632@findex OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
633@item OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
634Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
635a particular target machine. You can define a macro
636@code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS} to take account of this. This macro, if
637defined, is executed once just after all the command options have been
638parsed.
639
640Don't use this macro to turn on various extra optimizations for
641@samp{-O}. That is what @code{OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS} is for.
642
643@findex OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS
c6aded7c 644@item OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS (@var{level}, @var{size})
feca2ed3
JW
645Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
646various optimization levels. This macro, if defined, is executed once
647just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
648of the command options have been parsed. Values set in this macro are
649used as the default values for the other command line options.
650
651@var{level} is the optimization level specified; 2 if @samp{-O2} is
652specified, 1 if @samp{-O} is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
653
c6aded7c
AG
654@var{size} is non-zero if @samp{-Os} is specified and zero otherwise.
655
feca2ed3
JW
656You should not use this macro to change options that are not
657machine-specific. These should uniformly selected by the same
658optimization level on all supported machines. Use this macro to enable
659machine-specific optimizations.
660
661@strong{Do not examine @code{write_symbols} in
662this macro!} The debugging options are not supposed to alter the
663generated code.
664
665@findex CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
666@item CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
667Define this macro if debugging can be performed even without a frame
a3a15b4d 668pointer. If this macro is defined, GCC will turn on the
feca2ed3
JW
669@samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} option whenever @samp{-O} is specified.
670@end table
671
672@node Storage Layout
673@section Storage Layout
674@cindex storage layout
675
676Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
677alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
678expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
679@xref{Run-time Target}.
680
681@table @code
682@findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
683@item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
684Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
685byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
686This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
687bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
688be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
689macro need not be a constant.
690
691This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
692bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
693
694@findex BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
695@item BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
696Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
697word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
698
699@findex WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
700@item WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
701Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
702most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
a3a15b4d 703memory locations and registers; GCC fundamentally assumes that the
feca2ed3
JW
704order of words in memory is the same as the order in registers. This
705macro need not be a constant.
706
707@findex LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
708@item LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
709Define this macro if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN is not constant. This must be a
710constant value with the same meaning as WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN, which will be
711used only when compiling libgcc2.c. Typically the value will be set
712based on preprocessor defines.
713
714@findex FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
715@item FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
716Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
717@code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
718containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
719have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
720
721You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
722multi-word integers.
723
724@findex BITS_PER_UNIT
725@item BITS_PER_UNIT
726Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
727unit (byte); normally 8.
728
729@findex BITS_PER_WORD
730@item BITS_PER_WORD
731Number of bits in a word; normally 32.
732
733@findex MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
734@item MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
735Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
736@code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
737largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
738
739@findex UNITS_PER_WORD
740@item UNITS_PER_WORD
741Number of storage units in a word; normally 4.
742
743@findex MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
744@item MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
745Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
746@code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
747smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
748
749@findex POINTER_SIZE
750@item POINTER_SIZE
751Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
752width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
753you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}.
754
755@findex POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
756@item POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
757A C expression whose value is nonzero if pointers that need to be
f5963e61
JL
758extended from being @code{POINTER_SIZE} bits wide to @code{Pmode} are to
759be zero-extended and zero if they are to be sign-extended.
feca2ed3
JW
760
761You need not define this macro if the @code{POINTER_SIZE} is equal
762to the width of @code{Pmode}.
763
764@findex PROMOTE_MODE
765@item PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
766A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
767is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
768stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
769scalar type.
770
771On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
772register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
773@var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
774cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
775floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
776counterparts.
777
778For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
779However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
780either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
781the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
782sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
783@var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
784
785Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
786
787@findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
788@item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
789Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
790should also be done for outgoing function arguments.
791
792@findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
793@item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
794Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
795should also be done for the return value of functions.
796
797If this macro is defined, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same
798promotions done by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
799
800@findex PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
801@item PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
802Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
803should @emph{only} be performed for outgoing function arguments or
804function return values, as specified by @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS}
805and @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN}, respectively.
806
807@findex PARM_BOUNDARY
808@item PARM_BOUNDARY
809Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
810bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
811regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
812size of an integer.
813
814@findex STACK_BOUNDARY
815@item STACK_BOUNDARY
c795bca9
BS
816Define this macro if there is a guaranteed alignment for the stack
817pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression
818for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a
819default if PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY is not defined.
820
821@findex PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
822@item PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
feca2ed3
JW
823Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for
824the stack pointer. The definition is a C expression
c795bca9
BS
825for the desired alignment (measured in bits). If STACK_BOUNDARY is
826also defined, this macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger
827than STACK_BOUNDARY.
feca2ed3 828
c795bca9 829@cindex @code{PUSH_ROUNDING}, interaction with @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}
feca2ed3 830If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is not defined, the stack will always be aligned
c795bca9
BS
831to the specified boundary. If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined and specifies
832a less strict alignment than @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, the stack may
833be momentarily unaligned while pushing arguments.
feca2ed3
JW
834
835@findex FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
836@item FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
837Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
838
839@findex BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
840@item BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
841Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in bits.
842
861bb6c1
JL
843@findex MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
844@item MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
845If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
846object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
847nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
848on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
849
feca2ed3
JW
850@findex BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
851@item BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
852Biggest alignment that any structure field can require on this machine,
853in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
854structure fields only.
855
856@findex ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN
857@item ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
858An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
a3a15b4d 859alignment computed in the usual way is @var{computed}. GCC uses
feca2ed3
JW
860this value instead of the value in @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} or
861@code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT}, if defined, for structure fields only.
862
863@findex MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
864@item MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
865Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
866Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
867@code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
868the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
869
870@findex DATA_ALIGNMENT
871@item DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
8a198bd2
JW
872If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
873the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
874the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
feca2ed3
JW
875macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
876
877If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
878
879@findex strcpy
880One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
881make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
882arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
883constants to character arrays can be done inline.
884
885@findex CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
886@item CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
887If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
888that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
889@var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
890have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
891align the object.
892
893If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
894
895The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
896constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
897constants can be done inline.
898
d16790f2
JW
899@findex LOCAL_ALIGNMENT
900@item LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
901If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
902the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
903the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
904macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
905
906If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
907
908One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
909make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
910
feca2ed3
JW
911@findex EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
912@item EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
913Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit field that follows an
914empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
915
916Note that @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} also affects the alignment
917that results from an empty field.
918
919@findex STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
920@item STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
921Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
922Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
923
924If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
925@code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
926
927@findex STRICT_ALIGNMENT
928@item STRICT_ALIGNMENT
929Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
930if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
931go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
932
933@findex PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
934@item PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
935Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
936alignment of bitfields and the structures that contain them.
937
938The behavior is that the type written for a bitfield (@code{int},
939@code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the
940entire structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary
941field of that type. In addition, the bitfield is placed within the
942structure so that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a
943boundary for it.
944
945Thus, on most machines, a bitfield whose type is written as @code{int}
946would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force four-byte
947alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may not be four
948bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
949
950If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
951a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
952
953Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
954bitfields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
955support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
956@samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
957
958The other known way of making bitfields work is to define
959@code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
960Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
961
962Unless the machine has bitfield instructions or you define
963@code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
964@code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
965
a3a15b4d 966If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
feca2ed3
JW
967bitfields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
968what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
969
970@example
971struct foo1
972@{
973 char x;
974 char :0;
975 char y;
976@};
977
978struct foo2
979@{
980 char x;
981 int :0;
982 char y;
983@};
984
985main ()
986@{
987 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
988 sizeof (struct foo1));
989 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
990 sizeof (struct foo2));
991 exit (0);
992@}
993@end example
994
995If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
996get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
997
998@findex BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
999@item BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1000Like PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS except that its effect is limited to
1001aligning a bitfield within the structure.
1002
9f6dc500
HPN
1003@findex STRUCT_FORCE_BLK
1004@item STRUCT_FORCE_BLK (@var{field})
1005Return 1 if a structure containing @var{field} should be accessed using
1006@code{BLKMODE}.
1007
1008Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{c4x.h} for an example
1009of how to use this macro to prevent a structure having a floating point
1010field from being accessed in an integer mode.
1011
feca2ed3 1012@findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE
0003feb2
VM
1013@item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1014Define this macro as an expression for the overall size of a type
1015(given by @var{type} as a tree node) when the size computed in the
1016usual way is @var{computed} and the alignment is @var{specified}.
feca2ed3 1017
0003feb2 1018The default is to round @var{computed} up to a multiple of @var{specified}.
feca2ed3 1019
fed3cef0
RK
1020@findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE_UNIT
1021@item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1022Similar to @code{ROUND_TYPE_SIZE}, but sizes and alignments are
1023specified in units (bytes). If you define @code{ROUND_TYPE_SIZE},
1024you must also define this macro and they must be defined consistently
1025with each other.
1026
feca2ed3 1027@findex ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN
0003feb2
VM
1028@item ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1029Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1030by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1031way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
feca2ed3
JW
1032@var{specified}.
1033
1034The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1035the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1036
1037@findex MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1038@item MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1039An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1040machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1041this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1042appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1043(DImode)} is assumed.
1044
73c8090f
DE
1045@findex STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE
1046@item STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1047If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
39403d82
DE
1048specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1049@code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1050@var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1051@code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1052having its mode specified.
73c8090f
DE
1053
1054You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1055would most commonly define this macro if the
1056@code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
105764-bit mode.
1058
39403d82
DE
1059@findex STACK_SIZE_MODE
1060@item STACK_SIZE_MODE
1061If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1062specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1063@code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1064
1065You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1066You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1067pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1068
feca2ed3
JW
1069@findex CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE
1070@item CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE (@var{mode}, @var{value}, @var{overflow})
1071A C statement to validate the value @var{value} (of type
1072@code{double}) for mode @var{mode}. This means that you check whether
1073@var{value} fits within the possible range of values for mode
1074@var{mode} on this target machine. The mode @var{mode} is always
1075a mode of class @code{MODE_FLOAT}. @var{overflow} is nonzero if
1076the value is already known to be out of range.
1077
1078If @var{value} is not valid or if @var{overflow} is nonzero, you should
1079set @var{overflow} to 1 and then assign some valid value to @var{value}.
1080Allowing an invalid value to go through the compiler can produce
1081incorrect assembler code which may even cause Unix assemblers to crash.
1082
1083This macro need not be defined if there is no work for it to do.
1084
1085@findex TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1086@item TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1087A code distinguishing the floating point format of the target machine.
1088There are three defined values:
1089
1090@table @code
1091@findex IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1092@item IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1093This code indicates IEEE floating point. It is the default; there is no
1094need to define this macro when the format is IEEE.
1095
1096@findex VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1097@item VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1098This code indicates the peculiar format used on the Vax.
1099
1100@findex UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1101@item UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1102This code indicates any other format.
1103@end table
1104
1105The value of this macro is compared with @code{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT}
1106(@pxref{Config}) to determine whether the target machine has the same
1107format as the host machine. If any other formats are actually in use on
1108supported machines, new codes should be defined for them.
1109
1110The ordering of the component words of floating point values stored in
1111memory is controlled by @code{FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the target
1112machine and @code{HOST_FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the host.
e9a25f70
JL
1113
1114@findex DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1115@item DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
a3a15b4d 1116GCC supports two ways of implementing C++ vtables: traditional or with
e9a25f70
JL
1117so-called ``thunks''. The flag @samp{-fvtable-thunk} chooses between them.
1118Define this macro to be a C expression for the default value of that flag.
a3a15b4d 1119If @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} is 0, GCC uses the traditional
e9a25f70
JL
1120implementation by default. The ``thunk'' implementation is more efficient
1121(especially if you have provided an implementation of
1122@code{ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK}, see @ref{Function Entry}), but is not binary
1123compatible with code compiled using the traditional implementation.
89bcce1b 1124If you are writing a new port, define @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} to 1.
e9a25f70
JL
1125
1126If you do not define this macro, the default for @samp{-fvtable-thunk} is 0.
feca2ed3
JW
1127@end table
1128
1129@node Type Layout
1130@section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1131
1132These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1133basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1134the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1135languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1136
1137@table @code
1138@findex INT_TYPE_SIZE
1139@item INT_TYPE_SIZE
1140A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1141target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1142
1143@findex MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1144@item MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1145Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the target
1146machine. If this is undefined, the default is @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE}.
1147Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the largest value that
1148@code{INT_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is used in @code{cpp}.
1149
1150@findex SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1151@item SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1152A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1153target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1154(If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1155unit.)
1156
1157@findex LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1158@item LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1159A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1160target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1161
1162@findex MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1163@item MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1164Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1165target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1166@code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1167largest value that @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1168used in @code{cpp}.
1169
1170@findex LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1171@item LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1172A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1173target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1174words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of
1175macro must be at least 64.
1176
1177@findex CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1178@item CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1179A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
c294bd99
HPN
1180target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1181@code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
feca2ed3
JW
1182
1183@findex MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1184@item MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1185Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1186target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1187@code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1188largest value that @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1189used in @code{cpp}.
1190
1191@findex FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1192@item FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1193A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1194target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1195
1196@findex DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1197@item DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1198A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1199target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1200words.
1201
1202@findex LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1203@item LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1204A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1205the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1206words.
1207
e9a25f70
JL
1208@findex WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1209@item WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1210A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1211supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1212value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1213If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1214is the default.
1215
feca2ed3
JW
1216@findex DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1217@item DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1218An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1219@code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1220always override this default with the options @samp{-fsigned-char}
1221and @samp{-funsigned-char}.
1222
1223@findex DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1224@item DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1225A C expression to determine whether to give an @code{enum} type
1226only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range of possible values
1227of that type. A nonzero value means to do that; a zero value means all
1228@code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
1229
1230If you don't define the macro, the default is 0.
1231
1232@findex SIZE_TYPE
1233@item SIZE_TYPE
1234A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1235for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1236contents of the string.
1237
1238The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1239spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1240appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1241of the data type names defined in the function
1242@code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}. You may not
1243omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
1244crash on startup.
1245
1246If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1247int"}.
1248
1249@findex PTRDIFF_TYPE
1250@item PTRDIFF_TYPE
1251A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1252for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1253@code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1254@code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1255
1256If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1257
1258@findex WCHAR_TYPE
1259@item WCHAR_TYPE
1260A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1261for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1262the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1263information.
1264
1265If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1266
1267@findex WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1268@item WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1269A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1270characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1271@code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1272
1273@findex MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1274@item MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1275Maximum number for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1276characters. If this is undefined, the default is
1277@code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1278largest value that @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1279used in @code{cpp}.
1280
1281@findex OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1282@item OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1283Define this macro if the type of Objective C selectors should be
1284@code{int}.
1285
1286If this macro is not defined, then selectors should have the type
1287@code{struct objc_selector *}.
1288
1289@findex OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1290@item OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1291Define this macro if the compiler can group all the selectors together
1292into a vector and use just one label at the beginning of the vector.
1293Otherwise, the compiler must give each selector its own assembler
1294label.
1295
1296On certain machines, it is important to have a separate label for each
1297selector because this enables the linker to eliminate duplicate selectors.
1298
1299@findex TARGET_BELL
1300@item TARGET_BELL
1301A C constant expression for the integer value for escape sequence
1302@samp{\a}.
1303
1304@findex TARGET_TAB
1305@findex TARGET_BS
1306@findex TARGET_NEWLINE
1307@item TARGET_BS
1308@itemx TARGET_TAB
1309@itemx TARGET_NEWLINE
1310C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1311@samp{\b}, @samp{\t} and @samp{\n}.
1312
1313@findex TARGET_VT
1314@findex TARGET_FF
1315@findex TARGET_CR
1316@item TARGET_VT
1317@itemx TARGET_FF
1318@itemx TARGET_CR
1319C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1320@samp{\v}, @samp{\f} and @samp{\r}.
1321@end table
1322
1323@node Registers
1324@section Register Usage
1325@cindex register usage
1326
1327This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1328has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1329
1330The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1331done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1332on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1333For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1334For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1335
1336@menu
1337* Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1338* Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1339* Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1340* Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1341* Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
feca2ed3
JW
1342@end menu
1343
1344@node Register Basics
1345@subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1346
1347@c prevent bad page break with this line
1348Registers have various characteristics.
1349
1350@table @code
1351@findex FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1352@item FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1353Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1354numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1355pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1356@code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1357
1358@item FIXED_REGISTERS
1359@findex FIXED_REGISTERS
1360@cindex fixed register
1361An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1362all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1363general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1364pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1365register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1366machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1367and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1368
1369This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1370commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1371register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1372
1373The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1374the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1375by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1376the user with the command options @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1377@samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1378
1379@findex CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1380@item CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1381@cindex call-used register
1382@cindex call-clobbered register
1383@cindex call-saved register
1384Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1385clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1386registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1387available for general allocation of values that must live across
1388function calls.
1389
1390If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1391automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1392exit, if the register is used within the function.
1393
1e326708
MH
1394@findex HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1395@item HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1396@cindex call-used register
1397@cindex call-clobbered register
1398@cindex call-saved register
1399A C expression that is non-zero if it is not permissible to store a
1400value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1401call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1402macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1403preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1404
feca2ed3
JW
1405@findex CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1406@findex fixed_regs
1407@findex call_used_regs
1408@item CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
910bc42d
R
1409Zero or more C statements that may conditionally modify four variables
1410@code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}, @code{global_regs}
1411(these three are of type @code{char []}) and @code{reg_class_contents}
1412(of type @code{HARD_REG_SET}).
1413Before the macro is called @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}
30ef624b 1414and @code{reg_class_contents} have been initialized from
910bc42d
R
1415@code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} and
1416@code{REG_CLASS_CONTENTS}, respectively,
1417@code{global_regs} has been cleared, and any @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1418@samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}} command
1419options have been applied.
feca2ed3
JW
1420
1421This is necessary in case the fixed or call-clobbered registers depend
1422on target flags.
1423
1424You need not define this macro if it has no work to do.
1425
1426@cindex disabling certain registers
1427@cindex controlling register usage
1428If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
1429flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
1430@code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
1431registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC. Also define
1432the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
1433is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
1434
1435(However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
1436of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
1437controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
1438these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
1439
1440@findex NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1441@item NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1442If this macro is defined and has a nonzero value, it means that
1443@code{setjmp} and related functions fail to save the registers, or that
1444@code{longjmp} fails to restore them. To compensate, the compiler
1445avoids putting variables in registers in functions that use
1446@code{setjmp}.
1447
1448@findex INCOMING_REGNO
1449@item INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1450Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1451expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1452corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1453function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1454outbound register.
1455
1456@findex OUTGOING_REGNO
1457@item OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1458Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1459expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1460corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1461function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1462register.
1463
1464@ignore
1465@findex PC_REGNUM
1466@item PC_REGNUM
1467If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1468register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1469@end ignore
1470@end table
1471
1472@node Allocation Order
1473@subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1474@cindex order of register allocation
1475@cindex register allocation order
1476
1477@c prevent bad page break with this line
1478Registers are allocated in order.
1479
1480@table @code
1481@findex REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1482@item REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1483If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
a3a15b4d 1484numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
feca2ed3
JW
1485to use them (from most preferred to least).
1486
1487If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1488(all else being equal).
1489
1490One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1491registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1492instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1493machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
956d6950 1494the highest numbered allocable register first.
feca2ed3
JW
1495
1496@findex ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1497@item ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1498A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1499hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1500
1501Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1502Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1503register; and so on.
1504
1505The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1506@code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1507
1508On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1509@end table
1510
1511@node Values in Registers
1512@subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1513
1514This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1515(specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1516consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1517
1518@table @code
1519@findex HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1520@item HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1521A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1522at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1523@var{mode}.
1524
1525On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1526definition of this macro is
1527
1528@smallexample
1529#define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1530 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
32bd3974 1531 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
feca2ed3
JW
1532@end smallexample
1533
ce4d78eb
RH
1534@findex ALTER_HARD_SUBREG
1535@item ALTER_HARD_SUBREG (@var{tgt_mode}, @var{word}, @var{src_mode}, @var{regno})
1536A C expression that returns an adjusted hard register number for
1537
1538@smallexample
1539(subreg:@var{tgt_mode} (reg:@var{src_mode} @var{regno}) @var{word})
1540@end smallexample
1541
1542This may be needed if the target machine has mixed sized big-endian
1543registers, like Sparc v9.
1544
feca2ed3
JW
1545@findex HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1546@item HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1547A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1548of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1549registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1550are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1551
1552@smallexample
1553#define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1554@end smallexample
1555
e9a25f70
JL
1556You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1557because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
feca2ed3
JW
1558
1559@cindex register pairs
1560On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
e9a25f70
JL
1561register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1562odd register numbers for such modes.
feca2ed3
JW
1563
1564The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1565@samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
e9a25f70
JL
1566register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1567value into the register and back out not alter it.
feca2ed3 1568
e9a25f70
JL
1569Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1570all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
feca2ed3
JW
1571@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1572you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1573is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1574and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1575to be tieable.
1576
1577Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1578Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1579in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1580can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1581mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1582registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1583
1584On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1585modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1586registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1587non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1588@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1589floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1590normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1591unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1592register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1593
1594The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1595they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1596instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1597@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1598constraints for those instructions.
1599
1600On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1601so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1602register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1603floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1604be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1605
1606@findex MODES_TIEABLE_P
1607@item MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
e9a25f70 1608A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
956d6950 1609@var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
feca2ed3
JW
1610
1611If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
e9a25f70
JL
1612@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1613any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1614should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1615this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
956d6950 1616accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
e9a25f70
JL
1617
1618You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
a3a15b4d 1619possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
e9a25f70 1620allocation.
7506f491
DE
1621
1622@findex AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1623@item AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1624Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
a89608cb 1625registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
7506f491 1626@code{CCmode} is incomplete.
feca2ed3
JW
1627@end table
1628
1629@node Leaf Functions
1630@subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1631
1632@cindex leaf functions
1633@cindex functions, leaf
1634On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1635more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1636means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1637are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1638normally arrive.
1639
1640The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1641other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1642registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1643function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1644handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1645functions''.
1646
a3a15b4d 1647GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
feca2ed3
JW
1648suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1649registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1650accomplish this.
1651
1652@table @code
1653@findex LEAF_REGISTERS
1654@item LEAF_REGISTERS
7d167afd 1655Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
feca2ed3
JW
1656contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1657function treatment.
1658
1659If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1660registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
a3a15b4d 1661GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
feca2ed3
JW
1662used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1663in this vector.
1664
1665Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1666the treatment of leaf functions.
1667
1668@findex LEAF_REG_REMAP
1669@item LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1670A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1671should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1672
1673If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1674function before renumbering, then the expression should yield -1, which
1675will cause the compiler to abort.
1676
1677Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1678treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1679this.
1680@end table
1681
54ff41b7
JW
1682@findex current_function_is_leaf
1683@findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
feca2ed3 1684Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
54ff41b7
JW
1685treat leaf functions specially. They can test the C variable
1686@code{current_function_is_leaf} which is nonzero for leaf functions.
1687@code{current_function_is_leaf} is set prior to local register allocation
1688and is valid for the remaining compiler passes. They can also test the C
1689variable @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for
1690leaf functions which only use leaf registers.
1691@code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after reload and is
1692only useful if @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
feca2ed3
JW
1693@c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1694@c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1695
1696@node Stack Registers
1697@subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1698
1699There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1700``registers'' form a stack, as in the 80387 coprocessor for the 80386.
1701Stack registers are normally written by pushing onto the stack, and are
1702numbered relative to the top of the stack.
1703
a3a15b4d 1704Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
feca2ed3
JW
1705they must be consecutively numbered.
1706
1707@table @code
1708@findex STACK_REGS
1709@item STACK_REGS
1710Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1711
1712@findex FIRST_STACK_REG
1713@item FIRST_STACK_REG
1714The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1715of the stack.
1716
1717@findex LAST_STACK_REG
1718@item LAST_STACK_REG
1719The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1720the stack.
1721@end table
1722
feca2ed3
JW
1723@node Register Classes
1724@section Register Classes
1725@cindex register class definitions
1726@cindex class definitions, register
1727
1728On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1729For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1730certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1731restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1732
1733You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1734which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1735that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1736
1737@findex ALL_REGS
1738@findex NO_REGS
1739In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1740class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1741class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1742union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1743
1744@findex GENERAL_REGS
1745One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1746terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1747@samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1748the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1749to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1750
1751Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1752then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1753
1754The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1755constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1756You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1757them in operand constraints.
1758
1759You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
1760instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
1761either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
1762certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
1763which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code.
1764
1765You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
1766classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
1767contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
1768in their union.
1769
1770When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
1771certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
1772Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
1773a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
1774specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
1775
1776Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
1777instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
1778each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
1779mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
1780single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
1781this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
1782instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
1783single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
1784@code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
1785
1786@table @code
1787@findex enum reg_class
1788@item enum reg_class
1789An enumeral type that must be defined with all the register class names
1790as enumeral values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
1791must be the last register class, followed by one more enumeral value,
1792@code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
1793tells how many classes there are.
1794
1795Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
1796the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
1797in many of the tables described below.
1798
1799@findex N_REG_CLASSES
1800@item N_REG_CLASSES
1801The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
1802
1803@example
1804#define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
1805@end example
1806
1807@findex REG_CLASS_NAMES
1808@item REG_CLASS_NAMES
1809An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
1810constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
1811
1812@findex REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1813@item REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1814An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
1815which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
1816@var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
1817register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
1818
1819When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
1820Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
1821several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
1822for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
1823
1824@findex REGNO_REG_CLASS
1825@item REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
1826A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
1827@var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
1828which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
1829register.
1830
1831@findex BASE_REG_CLASS
1832@item BASE_REG_CLASS
1833A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1834base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
1835which is the register value plus a displacement.
1836
1837@findex INDEX_REG_CLASS
1838@item INDEX_REG_CLASS
1839A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1840index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
1841address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
1842added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
1843
1844@findex REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
1845@item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
1846A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
1847letters for register classes. If @var{char} is such a letter, the
1848value should be the register class corresponding to it. Otherwise,
1849the value should be @code{NO_REGS}. The register letter @samp{r},
1850corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
1851to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
1852
1853@findex REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1854@item REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
1855A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1856suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses. It may be
1857either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1858allocated such a hard register.
1859
861bb6c1
JL
1860@findex REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1861@item REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
1862A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
1863that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
1864@var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
1865reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
1866you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
1867@code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
1868
feca2ed3
JW
1869@findex REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
1870@item REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
1871A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1872suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
1873either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1874allocated such a hard register.
1875
1876The difference between an index register and a base register is that
1877the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
1878two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
1879labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
1880labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
1881may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
1882looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
1883only if neither labeling works.
1884
1885@findex PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
1886@item PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1887A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1888to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
1889@var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
1890another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
1891safe:
1892
1893@example
1894#define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
1895@end example
1896
1897Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
1898example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
1899for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
1900@code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
1901Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
1902
1903If @var{x} is a @code{const_double}, by returning @code{NO_REGS}
1904you can force @var{x} into a memory constant. This is useful on
1905certain machines where immediate floating values cannot be loaded into
1906certain kinds of registers.
1907
1908@findex PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1909@item PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1910Like @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
1911input reloads. If you don't define this macro, the default is to use
1912@var{class}, unchanged.
1913
1914@findex LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1915@item LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
1916A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1917to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
1918@var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
1919ordinarily be used.
1920
1921Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
1922there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
1923
1924The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
1925smaller class.
1926
1927Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
1928require the macro to do something nontrivial.
1929
1930@findex SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS
1931@findex SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1932@findex SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1933@item SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1934@itemx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1935@itemx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1936Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
1937from memory or even from other types of registers. An example is the
1938@samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
1939from general registers, but not memory. Some machines allow copying all
1940registers to and from memory, but require a scratch register for stores
1941to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic address on the RT,
1942and those with certain symbolic address on the Sparc when compiling
1943PIC). In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are
1944required.
1945
1946You should define these macros to indicate to the reload phase that it may
1947need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
1948register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
1949register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
1950you should define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
1951largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
1952intermediate registers or scratch registers.
1953
1954If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
1955intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
1956should be defined to return the largest register class required. If the
1957requirements for input and output reloads are the same, the macro
1958@code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should be used instead of defining both
1959macros identically.
1960
1961The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
1962Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
1963can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
1964@var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
1965macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
1966
1967If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
1968intermediate register), you should define patterns for
1969@samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
1970(@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which will normally be
1971implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
1972@samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
1973register.
1974
1975Define constraints for the reload register and scratch register that
1976contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
1977class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
1978value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
1979register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
1980Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
1981
1982@var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
1983pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
1984Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return -1 if the pseudo is
1985in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
1986
1987These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
1988registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
1989registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
1990would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
1991the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as a
1992intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
1993general registers.
1994
1995@findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1996@item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
1997Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
1998to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
1999those machines to be a C expression that is non-zero if objects of mode
2000@var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2001class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2002and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2003
2004Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2005
2006@findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
2007@item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2008Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2009allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2010If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2011defined by this macro.
2012
2013Do not define this macro if you do not define
2014@code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2015
2016@findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2017@item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2018When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2019registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2020hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2021load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2022same as that of @var{mode}.
2023
2024This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2025bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2026in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2027registers.
2028
2029However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2030the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2031differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2032widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2033suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2034details.
2035
2036Do not define this macro if you do not define
2037@code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2038is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2039
2040@findex SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2041@item SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
faa9eb19
BS
2042On some machines, it is risky to let hard registers live across arbitrary
2043insns. Typically, these machines have instructions that require values
2044to be in specific registers (like an accumulator), and reload will fail
2045if the required hard register is used for another purpose across such an
2046insn.
feca2ed3 2047
861bb6c1
JL
2048Define @code{SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES} to be an expression with a non-zero
2049value on these machines. When this macro has a non-zero value, the
faa9eb19 2050compiler will try to minimize the lifetime of hard registers.
feca2ed3 2051
861bb6c1
JL
2052It is always safe to define this macro with a non-zero value, but if you
2053unnecessarily define it, you will reduce the amount of optimizations
2054that can be performed in some cases. If you do not define this macro
2055with a non-zero value when it is required, the compiler will run out of
2056spill registers and print a fatal error message. For most machines, you
2057should not define this macro at all.
feca2ed3
JW
2058
2059@findex CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2060@item CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (@var{class})
2061A C expression whose value is nonzero if pseudos that have been assigned
2062to registers of class @var{class} would likely be spilled because
2063registers of @var{class} are needed for spill registers.
2064
2065The default value of this macro returns 1 if @var{class} has exactly one
2066register and zero otherwise. On most machines, this default should be
40687a9e 2067used. Only define this macro to some other expression if pseudos
feca2ed3
JW
2068allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their hard
2069registers were needed for spill registers. If this macro returns nonzero
2070for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
2071@file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
2072register. If there would not be another register available for
2073reallocation, you should not change the definition of this macro since
2074the only effect of such a definition would be to slow down register
2075allocation.
2076
2077@findex CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2078@item CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2079A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2080of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2081
2082This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2083the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2084should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2085@var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2086
2087This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2088in the reload pass.
2089
2090@item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_SIZE
2091If defined, a C expression for a class that contains registers which the
2092compiler must always access in a mode that is the same size as the mode
2093in which it loaded the register.
2094
2095For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2096floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64-bits.
2097Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2098does not store the low-order 32-bits, as would be the case for a normal
2099register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines this macro as
2100@code{FLOAT_REGS}.
2101@end table
2102
2103Three other special macros describe which operands fit which constraint
2104letters.
2105
2106@table @code
2107@findex CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2108@item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
e119b68c
MM
2109A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2110letters (@samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}) that specify
2111particular ranges of integer values. If @var{c} is one of those
2112letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer, is in
2113the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is
2114not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of
2115@var{value}.
feca2ed3
JW
2116
2117@findex CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2118@item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2119A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
e119b68c
MM
2120letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values
2121(@samp{G} or @samp{H}).
feca2ed3
JW
2122
2123If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
2124@var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
2125range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is not one of those
2126letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2127
2128@code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
2129@code{DImode} fixed-point constants. A given letter can accept either
2130or both kinds of values. It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
2131between these kinds.
2132
2133@findex EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
2134@item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
2135A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
04afd9d6 2136letters (@samp{Q}, @samp{R}, @samp{S}, @samp{T}, @samp{U}) that can
e119b68c
MM
2137be used to segregate specific types of operands, usually memory
2138references, for the target machine. Normally this macro will not be
2139defined. If it is required for a particular target machine, it should
2140return 1 if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type represented by
2141the constraint letter @var{c}. If @var{c} is not defined as an extra
2142constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
feca2ed3
JW
2143
2144For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output in r0 if
2145the memory reference contains a symbolic address. Constraint letter
2146@samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
2147@emph{not} contain a symbolic address. An alternative is specified with
2148a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output. The next
2149alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
2150does not include r0 on the output.
2151@end table
2152
2153@node Stack and Calling
2154@section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2155@cindex calling conventions
2156
2157@c prevent bad page break with this line
2158This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2159
2160@menu
2161* Frame Layout::
861bb6c1 2162* Stack Checking::
feca2ed3
JW
2163* Frame Registers::
2164* Elimination::
2165* Stack Arguments::
2166* Register Arguments::
2167* Scalar Return::
2168* Aggregate Return::
2169* Caller Saves::
2170* Function Entry::
2171* Profiling::
b36f4ed3 2172* Inlining::
feca2ed3
JW
2173@end menu
2174
2175@node Frame Layout
2176@subsection Basic Stack Layout
2177@cindex stack frame layout
2178@cindex frame layout
2179
2180@c prevent bad page break with this line
2181Here is the basic stack layout.
2182
2183@table @code
2184@findex STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2185@item STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2186Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2187pointer to a smaller address.
2188
2189When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{},'' it means that the
2190compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2191definition used does not matter.
2192
2193@findex FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2194@item FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2195Define this macro if the addresses of local variable slots are at negative
2196offsets from the frame pointer.
2197
2198@findex ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2199@item ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2200Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2201addresses on the stack.
2202
2203@findex STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2204@item STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2205Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2206
2207If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2208subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2209Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2210value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2211@c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2212@c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2213
2214@findex STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2215@item STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2216Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2217outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2218zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2219
2220If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2221the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2222
2223@findex FIRST_PARM_OFFSET
2224@item FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2225Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2226address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2227function.
2228
2229If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2230the first argument's address.
2231
2232@findex STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET
2233@item STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2234Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2235on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2236
2237The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2238length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2239machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2240
2241@findex DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
2242@item DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2243A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2244frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2245@var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2246itself.
2247
2248If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2249of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2250address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2251
2252@findex SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
0bc02db4 2253@item SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
feca2ed3
JW
2254If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2255setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2256on the Sparc, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
0bc02db4
MS
2257before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2258define this macro.
2259
2260@findex BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2261@item BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2262If defined, a C expression that contains an rtx that is used to store
2263the address of the current frame into the built in @code{setjmp} buffer.
2264The default value, @code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx}, is correct for most
2265machines. One reason you may need to define this macro is if
2266@code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} is the appropriate value on your machine.
feca2ed3
JW
2267
2268@findex RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2269@item RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2270A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
861bb6c1
JL
2271address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2272the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2273frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
feca2ed3
JW
2274@code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2275
e9a25f70
JL
2276The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2277@var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is not way to
2278determine the return address of other frames.
2279
feca2ed3
JW
2280@findex RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2281@item RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2282Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2283from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
861bb6c1
JL
2284
2285@findex INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2286@item INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2287A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2288incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2289prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2290value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2291the stack.
2292
2293You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2294debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2295
2c849145
JM
2296If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2297DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2298
861bb6c1
JL
2299@findex INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2300@item INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2301A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2302from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2303frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2304the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2305previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2306
71038426
RH
2307You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2308debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2309
2310@findex ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET
2c849145 2311@item ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
71038426
RH
2312A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2313from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2314final value should coincide with that calculated by
2315@code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2316during virtual register instantiation.
2317
2c849145
JM
2318The default value for this macro is @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl)},
2319which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
208e52d9
JM
2320immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2321some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2322and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2c849145 2323
208e52d9 2324You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2c849145
JM
2325want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2326DWARF 2.
512b62fb
JM
2327
2328@findex SMALL_STACK
2329@item SMALL_STACK
2330Define this macro if the stack size for the target is very small. This
2331has the effect of disabling gcc's builtin @samp{alloca}, though
2332@samp{__builtin_alloca} is not affected.
861bb6c1
JL
2333@end table
2334
2335@node Stack Checking
2336@subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2337
a3a15b4d 2338GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of
861bb6c1
JL
2339the stack, if the @samp{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of three ways:
2340
2341@enumerate
2342@item
a3a15b4d 2343If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
861bb6c1
JL
2344will assume that you have arranged for stack checking to be done at
2345appropriate places in the configuration files, e.g., in
a3a15b4d 2346@code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}. GCC will do not other special processing.
861bb6c1
JL
2347
2348@item
2349If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and you defined a named pattern
a3a15b4d 2350called @code{check_stack} in your @file{md} file, GCC will call that
861bb6c1
JL
2351pattern with one argument which is the address to compare the stack
2352value against. You must arrange for this pattern to report an error if
2353the stack pointer is out of range.
2354
2355@item
a3a15b4d 2356If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
861bb6c1
JL
2357``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2358@end enumerate
2359
a3a15b4d 2360Normally, you will use the default values of these macros, so GCC
861bb6c1
JL
2361will use the third approach.
2362
2363@table @code
2364@findex STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2365@item STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2366A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2367machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2368is require by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to have to stack
a3a15b4d 2369checking in some more efficient way than GCC's portable approach.
861bb6c1
JL
2370The default value of this macro is zero.
2371
2372@findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2373@item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
a3a15b4d 2374An integer representing the interval at which GCC must generate stack
861bb6c1
JL
2375probe instructions. You will normally define this macro to be no larger
2376than the size of the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The
2377default value of 4096 is suitable for most systems.
2378
2379@findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2380@item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
a3a15b4d
JL
2381A integer which is nonzero if GCC should perform the stack probe
2382as a load instruction and zero if GCC should use a store instruction.
861bb6c1
JL
2383The default is zero, which is the most efficient choice on most systems.
2384
2385@findex STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2386@item STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2387The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow,
2388for languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of
238975 words should be adequate for most machines.
2390
2391@findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2392@item STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
a3a15b4d 2393The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
861bb6c1
JL
2394instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2395stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
a3a15b4d
JL
2396checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2397default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
861bb6c1
JL
2398systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2399
2400@findex STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2401@item STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
a3a15b4d 2402GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
861bb6c1
JL
2403represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2404space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2405You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2406use the default of four words.
2407
2408@findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2409@item STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
a3a15b4d 2410The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
861bb6c1
JL
2411fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2412@samp{-fstack-check}.
a3a15b4d 2413GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
861bb6c1 2414normally not need to override that default.
feca2ed3
JW
2415@end table
2416
2417@need 2000
2418@node Frame Registers
2419@subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2420
2421@c prevent bad page break with this line
2422This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2423
2424@table @code
2425@findex STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2426@item STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2427The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2428fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2429the hardware determines which register this is.
2430
2431@findex FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2432@item FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2433The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2434access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2435hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2436choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2437
2438@findex HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2439@item HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2440On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2441offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2442allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2443between these two locations). On those machines, define
2444@code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2445be used internally until the offset is known, and define
556e0f21 2446@code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
feca2ed3
JW
2447used for the frame pointer.
2448
2449You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2450is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2451the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2452completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2453definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2454@code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2455or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2456
2457Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2458@code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2459
2460@findex ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2461@item ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2462The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2463the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2464frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2465register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2466wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2467pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2468@code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2469(@pxref{Elimination}).
2470
2471@findex RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2472@item RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2473The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2474access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2475machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2476pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2477to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2478@code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2479
2480Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2481address from the stack.
2482
2483@findex STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2484@findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2485@item STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2486@itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2487Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2488register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2489function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2490number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2491these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2492not be defined.@refill
2493
2494The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2495
2496If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2497defined; instead, the next two macros should be defined.
2498
2499@findex STATIC_CHAIN
2500@findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2501@item STATIC_CHAIN
2502@itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2503If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros provide rtx giving
2504@code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
2505@code{STATIC_CHAIN} and @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING} give the locations
2506as seen by the calling and called functions, respectively. Often the former
2507will be at an offset from the stack pointer and the latter at an offset from
2508the frame pointer.@refill
2509
2510@findex stack_pointer_rtx
2511@findex frame_pointer_rtx
2512@findex arg_pointer_rtx
2513The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
2514@code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized prior to the use of these
2515macros and should be used to refer to those items.
2516
2517If the static chain is passed in a register, the two previous macros should
2518be defined instead.
2519@end table
2520
2521@node Elimination
2522@subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
2523
2524@c prevent bad page break with this line
2525This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
2526
2527@table @code
2528@findex FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2529@item FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2530A C expression which is nonzero if a function must have and use a frame
2531pointer. This expression is evaluated in the reload pass. If its value is
2532nonzero the function will have a frame pointer.
2533
2534The expression can in principle examine the current function and decide
2535according to the facts, but on most machines the constant 0 or the
2536constant 1 suffices. Use 0 when the machine allows code to be generated
2537with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space. Use 1
2538when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame pointer.
2539
2540In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
2541without a frame pointer. The compiler recognizes those cases and
2542automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
2543@code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} says. You don't need to worry about
2544them.@refill
2545
2546In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
2547register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
2548fixed register. See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
2549
2550@findex INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET
2551@findex get_frame_size
2552@item INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
2553A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
2554between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
2555the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
2556such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
2557registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
2558
2559If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
2560need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
2561@code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} is defined to always be true; in that
2562case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
2563
2564@findex ELIMINABLE_REGS
2565@item ELIMINABLE_REGS
2566If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
2567eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
2568defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
2569references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
2570
2571The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
2572of which specifies an original and replacement register.
2573
2574On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
2575the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
2576must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
2577replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
2578depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
2579
2580In this case, you might specify:
2581@example
2582#define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
2583@{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2584 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2585 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
2586@end example
2587
2588Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
2589specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
2590
2591@findex CAN_ELIMINATE
2592@item CAN_ELIMINATE (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg})
2593A C expression that returns non-zero if the compiler is allowed to try
2594to replace register number @var{from-reg} with register number
2595@var{to-reg}. This macro need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
2596is defined, and will usually be the constant 1, since most of the cases
2597preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
2598knows about.
2599
2600@findex INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET
2601@item INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
2602This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
2603specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
2604registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
2605defined.
2606
2607@findex LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2608@item LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2609Define this macro if the @code{longjmp} function restores registers from
2610the stack frames, rather than from those saved specifically by
2611@code{setjmp}. Certain quantities must not be kept in registers across
2612a call to @code{setjmp} on such machines.
2613@end table
2614
2615@node Stack Arguments
2616@subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
2617@cindex arguments on stack
2618@cindex stack arguments
2619
2620The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
2621on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
2622control passing certain arguments in registers.
2623
2624@table @code
2625@findex PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2626@item PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
7d473569
JJ
2627A C expression whose value is nonzero if an argument declared in
2628a prototype as an integral type smaller than @code{int} should
2629actually be passed as an @code{int}. In addition to avoiding
2630errors in certain cases of mismatch, it also makes for better
2631code on certain machines. If the macro is not defined in target
2632header files, it defaults to 0.
feca2ed3 2633
f73ad30e
JH
2634@findex PUSH_ARGS
2635@item PUSH_ARGS
2636A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
2637outgoing arguments.
2638If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
2639That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
2640allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
2641it. When PUSH_ARGS is nonzero, PUSH_ROUNDING must be defined too.
2642On some machines, the definition
2643
2644@findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2645@item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2646A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2647stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
feca2ed3
JW
2648@findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2649@item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2650A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2651stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
feca2ed3
JW
2652
2653On some machines, the definition
2654
2655@example
2656#define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
2657@end example
2658
2659@noindent
2660will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
2661to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
2662alignment. Then the definition should be
2663
2664@example
2665#define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
2666@end example
2667
2668@findex ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2669@findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
2670@item ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
f73ad30e 2671A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
feca2ed3
JW
2672will be computed and placed into the variable
2673@code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
2674onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
2675increase the stack frame size by this amount.
2676
f73ad30e 2677Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
feca2ed3
JW
2678is not proper.
2679
2680@findex REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2681@item REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
2682Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
2683allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
2684registers.
2685
2686The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
ab87f8c8 2687arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
a3a15b4d 2688which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
feca2ed3
JW
2689
2690This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
2691machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
2692which.
2693@c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
2694@c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
2695
2696@findex MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2697@findex FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2698@item MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2699@itemx FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{const_size}, @var{var_size})
2700Define these macros in addition to the one above if functions might
2701allocate stack space for arguments even when their values are passed
2702in registers. These should be used when the stack space allocated
2703for arguments in registers is not a simple constant independent of the
2704function declaration.
2705
2706The value of the first macro is the size, in bytes, of the area that
2707we should initially assume would be reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2708
2709The value of the second macro is the actual size, in bytes, of the area
2710that will be reserved for arguments passed in registers. This takes two
2711arguments: an integer representing the number of bytes of fixed sized
2712arguments on the stack, and a tree representing the number of bytes of
2713variable sized arguments on the stack.
2714
2715When these macros are defined, @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} will only be
2716called for libcall functions, the current function, or for a function
2717being called when it is known that such stack space must be allocated.
2718In each case this value can be easily computed.
2719
2720When deciding whether a called function needs such stack space, and how
a3a15b4d 2721much space to reserve, GCC uses these two macros instead of
feca2ed3
JW
2722@code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}.
2723
2724@findex OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2725@item OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2726Define this if it is the responsibility of the caller to allocate the area
2727reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2728
2729If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
2730whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
2731@code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
2732
2733@findex STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2734@item STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2735Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
2736stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
2737@c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
2738@c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
2739
2740Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
2741stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
2742suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
2743stack in its natural location.
2744
2745@findex RETURN_POPS_ARGS
2746@item RETURN_POPS_ARGS (@var{fundecl}, @var{funtype}, @var{stack-size})
2747A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes of its own
2748arguments that a function pops on returning, or 0 if the
2749function pops no arguments and the caller must therefore pop them all
2750after the function returns.
2751
2752@var{fundecl} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that describes
2753the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2754@code{FUNCTION_DECL} that describes the declaration of the function.
2755From this you can obtain the DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of the function.
2756
2757@var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
2758describes the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2759@code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
2760From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
2761arguments (if known).
2762
861bb6c1 2763When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{fundecl}
feca2ed3
JW
2764will contain an identifier node for the library function. Thus, if
2765you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
2766by their names. Note that ``library function'' in this context means
2767a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
2768in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
2769
2770@var{stack-size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
2771stack. If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
2772argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
2773
2774On the Vax, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
2775of this macro is @var{stack-size}. On the 68000, using the standard
2776calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
2777the macro is always 0 in this case. But an alternative calling
2778convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
2779arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
2780nothing (the caller pops all). When this convention is in use,
2781@var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
2782number of arguments.
2783@end table
2784
2785@node Register Arguments
2786@subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
2787@cindex arguments in registers
2788@cindex registers arguments
2789
2790This section describes the macros which let you control how various
2791types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
2792the stack.
2793
2794@table @code
2795@findex FUNCTION_ARG
2796@item FUNCTION_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2797A C expression that controls whether a function argument is passed
2798in a register, and which register.
2799
2800The arguments are @var{cum}, which summarizes all the previous
2801arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
2802the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
2803(which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
2804which is 1 for an ordinary argument and 0 for nameless arguments that
2805correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called function's prototype.
2806
2807The value of the expression is usually either a @code{reg} RTX for the
2808hard register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the
2809argument on the stack.
2810
2811For machines like the Vax and 68000, where normally all arguments are
2812pushed, zero suffices as a definition.
2813
2814The value of the expression can also be a @code{parallel} RTX. This is
2815used when an argument is passed in multiple locations. The mode of the
2816of the @code{parallel} should be the mode of the entire argument. The
2817@code{parallel} holds any number of @code{expr_list} pairs; each one
f797c10b
NC
2818describes where part of the argument is passed. In each
2819@code{expr_list} the first operand must be a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
2820register in which to pass this part of the argument, and the mode of the
2821register RTX indicates how large this part of the argument is. The
2822second operand of the @code{expr_list} is a @code{const_int} which gives
2823the offset in bytes into the entire argument of where this part starts.
2824As a special exception the first @code{expr_list} in the @code{parallel}
c980b85b
NC
2825RTX may have a first operand of zero. This indicates that the entire
2826argument is also stored on the stack.
feca2ed3
JW
2827
2828@cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
2829The usual way to make the ANSI library @file{stdarg.h} work on a machine
2830where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to cause
2831nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead. This is done
2832by making @code{FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever @var{named} is 0.
2833
2834@cindex @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2835@cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2836You may use the macro @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})}
2837in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
2838type that must be passed in the stack. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
2839is not defined and @code{FUNCTION_ARG} returns non-zero for such an
2840argument, the compiler will abort. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
2841defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
2842a register.
2843
d9a4ee00
JL
2844@findex MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
2845@item MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2846Define as a C expression that evaluates to nonzero if we do not know how
2847to pass TYPE solely in registers. The file @file{expr.h} defines a
2848definition that is usually appropriate, refer to @file{expr.h} for additional
2849documentation.
2850
feca2ed3
JW
2851@findex FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
2852@item FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2853Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
2854that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
2855necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
2856argument.
2857
2858For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in which
2859the caller passes the value, and @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should
2860be defined in a similar fashion to tell the function being called
2861where the arguments will arrive.
2862
2863If @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined, @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2864serves both purposes.@refill
2865
2866@findex FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
2867@item FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2868A C expression for the number of words, at the beginning of an
2869argument, must be put in registers. The value must be zero for
2870arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
2871pushed on the stack.
2872
2873On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
2874registers and partially in memory. On these machines, typically the
2875first @var{n} words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
2876on the stack. If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
2877structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
2878in registers and the rest must be pushed. This macro tells the
2879compiler when this occurs, and how many of the words should go in
2880registers.
2881
2882@code{FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
2883register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
2884@code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
2885
2886@findex FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
2887@item FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2888A C expression that indicates when an argument must be passed by reference.
2889If nonzero for an argument, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
2890pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
2891The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
2892to that type.
2893
2894On machines where @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is not defined, a suitable
2895definition of this macro might be
2896@smallexample
2897#define FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE\
2898(CUM, MODE, TYPE, NAMED) \
2899 MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (MODE, TYPE)
2900@end smallexample
2901@c this is *still* too long. --mew 5feb93
2902
2903@findex FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES
2904@item FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2905If defined, a C expression that indicates when it is the called function's
2906responsibility to make a copy of arguments passed by invisible reference.
2907Normally, the caller makes a copy and passes the address of the copy to the
2908routine being called. When FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES is defined and is
2909nonzero, the caller does not make a copy. Instead, it passes a pointer to the
2910``live'' value. The called function must not modify this value. If it can be
2911determined that the value won't be modified, it need not make a copy;
2912otherwise a copy must be made.
2913
2914@findex CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2915@item CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2916A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument of
2917@code{FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some target machines,
2918the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number of bytes of
2919argument so far.
2920
2921There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
2922arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
2923variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
2924arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
2925@code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
2926should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
2927
2928@findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2929@item INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{indirect})
2930A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable @var{cum}
2931for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The variable has
2932type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype} is the tree node
2933for the data type of the function which will receive the args, or 0
2934if the args are to a compiler support library function. The value of
2935@var{indirect} is nonzero when processing an indirect call, for example
2936a call through a function pointer. The value of @var{indirect} is zero
2937for a call to an explicitly named function, a library function call, or when
2938@code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
2939being compiled.
2940
2941When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
2942@var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
2943contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
2944an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
2945macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
2946never both of them at once.
2947
2948@findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS
2949@item INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
2950Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
2951finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
2952undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
2953
2954The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
a3a15b4d 2955with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC. The
feca2ed3
JW
2956argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
2957@code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
2958@c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
2959@c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
2960
2961@findex FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
2962@item FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2963A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the summarizer variable
2964@var{cum} to advance past an argument in the argument list. The
2965values @var{mode}, @var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.
2966Once this is done, the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing
2967the @emph{following} argument with @code{FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.@refill
2968
2969This macro need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
2970on the stack. The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
2971used for arguments without any special help.
2972
2973@findex FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
2974@item FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2975If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
2976to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
2977@code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
2978@code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
2979
2980The @emph{amount} of padding is always just enough to reach the next
2981multiple of @code{FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY}; this macro does not control
2982it.
2983
2984This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
2985For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
2986big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
2987constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
2988
5e4f6244
CP
2989@findex PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
2990@item PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
2991If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
2992implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
2993next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
2994controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
2995arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
2996
feca2ed3
JW
2997@findex FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
2998@item FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2999If defined, a C expression that gives the alignment boundary, in bits,
3000of an argument with the specified mode and type. If it is not defined,
3001@code{PARM_BOUNDARY} is used for all arguments.
3002
3003@findex FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P
3004@item FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3005A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3006register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3007@emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3008the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3009used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3010stack.
bb1b857a
GK
3011
3012@findex LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
3013@item LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
3014If defined, the order in which arguments are loaded into their
3015respective argument registers is reversed so that the last
4e5f1329 3016argument is loaded first. This macro only affects arguments
bb1b857a
GK
3017passed in registers.
3018
feca2ed3
JW
3019@end table
3020
3021@node Scalar Return
3022@subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3023@cindex return values in registers
3024@cindex values, returned by functions
3025@cindex scalars, returned as values
3026
3027This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3028values---values that can fit in registers.
3029
3030@table @code
3031@findex TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
3032@item TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
3033Define this macro if @samp{-traditional} should not cause functions
3034declared to return @code{float} to convert the value to @code{double}.
3035
3036@findex FUNCTION_VALUE
3037@item FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3038A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a
3039function returns a value of data type @var{valtype}. @var{valtype} is
3040a tree node representing a data type. Write @code{TYPE_MODE
3041(@var{valtype})} to get the machine mode used to represent that type.
3042On many machines, only the mode is relevant. (Actually, on most
3043machines, scalar values are returned in the same place regardless of
3044mode).@refill
3045
3046The value of the expression is usually a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
3047register where the return value is stored. The value can also be a
3048@code{parallel} RTX, if the return value is in multiple places. See
3049@code{FUNCTION_ARG} for an explanation of the @code{parallel} form.
3050
3051If @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} is defined, you must apply the same
3052promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if @var{valtype} is a
3053scalar type.
3054
3055If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
3056node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3057pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3058convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3059known.@refill
3060
3061@code{FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return vales with aggregate data
3062types, because these are returned in another way. See
3063@code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3064
3065@findex FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE
3066@item FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3067Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows''
3068so that the register in which a function returns its value is not
3069the same as the one in which the caller sees the value.
3070
3071For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} computes the register in which
3072the caller will see the value. @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} should be
3073defined in a similar fashion to tell the function where to put the
3074value.@refill
3075
3076If @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not defined,
3077@code{FUNCTION_VALUE} serves both purposes.@refill
3078
3079@code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not used for return vales with
3080aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way. See
3081@code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3082
3083@findex LIBCALL_VALUE
3084@item LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3085A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3086function returns a value of mode @var{mode}. If the precise function
3087being called is known, @var{func} is a tree node
3088(@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3089pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3090convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3091known.@refill
3092
3093Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3094support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3095specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3096compiled.
3097
3098The definition of @code{LIBRARY_VALUE} need not be concerned aggregate
3099data types, because none of the library functions returns such types.
3100
3101@findex FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3102@item FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3103A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3104register in which the values of called function may come back.
3105
3106A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3107second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3108recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3109suffices:
3110
3111@example
3112#define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3113@end example
3114
3115If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3116function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3117should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3118
3119@findex APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3120@item APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3121Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3122need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3123saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3124@end table
3125
3126@node Aggregate Return
3127@subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3128@cindex aggregates as return values
3129@cindex large return values
3130@cindex returning aggregate values
3131@cindex structure value address
3132
3133When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3134cases), the value is not returned according to @code{FUNCTION_VALUE}
3135(@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the caller passes the address of a
3136block of memory in which the value should be stored. This address
3137is called the @dfn{structure value address}.
3138
3139This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3140memory.
3141
3142@table @code
3143@findex RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3144@item RETURN_IN_MEMORY (@var{type})
3145A C expression which can inhibit the returning of certain function
3146values in registers, based on the type of value. A nonzero value says
3147to return the function value in memory, just as large structures are
3148always returned. Here @var{type} will be a C expression of type
3149@code{tree}, representing the data type of the value.
3150
3151Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
3152by this macro. Also, the option @samp{-fpcc-struct-return}
3153takes effect regardless of this macro. On most systems, it is
3154possible to leave the macro undefined; this causes a default
3155definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
3156values, and 0 otherwise.
3157
3158Do not use this macro to indicate that structures and unions should always
3159be returned in memory. You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
3160to indicate this.
3161
3162@findex DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3163@item DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3164Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3165in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3166only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI.
3167If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3168and union return values are decided by the @code{RETURN_IN_MEMORY} macro.
3169
3170If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3171
3172@findex STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3173@item STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3174If the structure value address is passed in a register, then
3175@code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} should be the number of that register.
3176
3177@findex STRUCT_VALUE
3178@item STRUCT_VALUE
3179If the structure value address is not passed in a register, define
3180@code{STRUCT_VALUE} as an expression returning an RTX for the place
3181where the address is passed. If it returns 0, the address is passed as
3182an ``invisible'' first argument.
3183
3184@findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3185@item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3186On some architectures the place where the structure value address
3187is found by the called function is not the same place that the
3188caller put it. This can be due to register windows, or it could
3189be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
3190
3191If the incoming location of the structure value address is in a
3192register, define this macro as the register number.
3193
3194@findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3195@item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3196If the incoming location is not a register, then you should define
3197@code{STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING} as an expression for an RTX for where the
3198called function should find the value. If it should find the value on
3199the stack, define this to create a @code{mem} which refers to the frame
3200pointer. A definition of 0 means that the address is passed as an
3201``invisible'' first argument.
3202
3203@findex PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3204@item PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3205Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3206for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3207the address of a static variable containing the value.
3208
3209Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3210pass an address to the subroutine.
3211
3212This macro has effect in @samp{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3213nothing when you use @samp{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3214@end table
3215
3216@node Caller Saves
3217@subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3218
a3a15b4d 3219If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
feca2ed3
JW
3220makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3221must live across calls.
3222
3223@table @code
3224@findex DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3225@item DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3226Define this macro if function calls on the target machine do not preserve
3227any registers; in other words, if @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} has 1
81610a0d
HPN
3228for all registers. When defined, this macro enables @samp{-fcaller-saves}
3229by default for all optimization levels. It has no effect for optimization
3230levels 2 and higher, where @samp{-fcaller-saves} is the default.
feca2ed3
JW
3231
3232@findex CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE
3233@item CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
3234A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
3235a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
3236restoring it around each function call. The expression should be 1 when
3237this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
3238
3239If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
3240machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
8d5c8167
JL
3241
3242@findex HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE
3243@item HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3244A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3245of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3246@var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3247returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3248will select the smallest suitable mode.
feca2ed3
JW
3249@end table
3250
3251@node Function Entry
3252@subsection Function Entry and Exit
3253@cindex function entry and exit
3254@cindex prologue
3255@cindex epilogue
3256
3257This section describes the macros that output function entry
3258(@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3259
3260@table @code
3261@findex FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3262@item FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3263A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
3264function. The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
3265initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
3266saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
3267local variables. @var{size} is an integer. @var{file} is a stdio
3268stream to which the assembler code should be output.
3269
3270The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
3271macro. That has already been done when the macro is run.
3272
3273@findex regs_ever_live
3274To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
3275@code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
3276@var{r} is used anywhere within the function. This implies the function
3277prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
3278call-used registers. (@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
3279@code{regs_ever_live}.)
3280
3281On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
3282not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
3283they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
3284appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
3285registers are used in the function.
3286
3287@findex frame_pointer_needed
3288On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3289function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
3290pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise. To determine whether a
3291frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3292@code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 at run
3293time in a function that needs a frame pointer. @xref{Elimination}.
3294
3295The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
3296required for the function. This stack space consists of the regions
3297listed below. In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
3298order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
3299stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
3300the highest address if it is not defined). You can use a different order
3301for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
3302compatibility reasons. Except in cases where required by standard
3303or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
3304need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
3305
3306@itemize @bullet
3307@item
3308@findex current_function_pretend_args_size
3309A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
3310uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3311stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3312if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3313arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3314yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3315region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3316registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3317features in @file{varargs.h} and @file{stdargs.h}.
3318
3319@item
3320An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3321The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3322the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3323machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3324in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3325a save area.
3326
3327@item
3328A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3329boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3330this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3331save area closer to the top of the stack.
3332
3333@item
3334@cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3335Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3336@code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3337argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3338@end itemize
3339
3340Normally, it is necessary for the macros @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3341@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to treat leaf functions specially. The C
54ff41b7 3342variable @code{current_function_is_leaf} is nonzero for such a function.
feca2ed3
JW
3343
3344@findex EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3345@item EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3346Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3347instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3348pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3349adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.
3350
3351Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3352frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3353stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3354compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3355
3356@findex EPILOGUE_USES
3357@item EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
8760eaae 3358Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
feca2ed3
JW
3359used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3360pointer registers are already be assumed to be used as needed.
3361
3362@findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3363@item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3364A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
3365function. The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
3366registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
3367called, and returning control to the caller. This macro takes the
3368same arguments as the macro @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
3369registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
3370@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
3371
3372On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
3373of returning from the function. On these machines, give that
3374instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
3375@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
3376
3377Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
3378@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used. If you want the target switches
3379to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used, define a
3380@samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the target
3381switches appropriately. If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
3382condition is false, epilogues will be used.
3383
3384On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3385function exit code must vary accordingly. Sometimes the code for these
3386two cases is completely different. To determine whether a frame pointer
3387is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3388@code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
3389a function that needs a frame pointer.
3390
3391Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
54ff41b7
JW
3392treat leaf functions specially. The C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
3393is nonzero for such a function. @xref{Leaf Functions}.
feca2ed3
JW
3394
3395On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
3396others leave that for the caller to do. For example, the 68020 when
3397given @samp{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
3398number of arguments.
3399
3400@findex current_function_pops_args
3401Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
3402functions pop their own arguments. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} needs to
3403know what was decided. The variable that is called
3404@code{current_function_pops_args} is the number of bytes of its
3405arguments that a function should pop. @xref{Scalar Return}.
3406@c what is the "its arguments" in the above sentence referring to, pray
3407@c tell? --mew 5feb93
3408
3409@findex DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3410@item DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3411Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
3412instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''. The
3413definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
3414representing the number of delay slots there.
3415
3416@findex ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY
3417@item ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
3418A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
3419slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
3420
3421The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
3422being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
3423eligibility). It is never negative and is always less than the number
3424of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
3425If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
3426may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot. Also, other insns may
3427(at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
3428slot.
3429
3430@findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
3431@findex final_scan_insn
3432The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
3433list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
3434@code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}. The insn for the first
3435delay slot comes first in the list. Your definition of the macro
3436@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by outputting the
3437insns in this list, usually by calling @code{final_scan_insn}.
3438
3439You need not define this macro if you did not define
3440@code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
3441
3442@findex ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3443@item ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (@var{file}, @var{thunk_fndecl}, @var{delta}, @var{function})
3444A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for a thunk
3445function, used to implement C++ virtual function calls with multiple
3446inheritance. The thunk acts as a wrapper around a virtual function,
3447adjusting the implicit object parameter before handing control off to
3448the real function.
3449
3450First, emit code to add the integer @var{delta} to the location that
3451contains the incoming first argument. Assume that this argument
3452contains a pointer, and is the one used to pass the @code{this} pointer
3453in C++. This is the incoming argument @emph{before} the function prologue,
3454e.g. @samp{%o0} on a sparc. The addition must preserve the values of
3455all other incoming arguments.
3456
3457After the addition, emit code to jump to @var{function}, which is a
3458@code{FUNCTION_DECL}. This is a direct pure jump, not a call, and does
3459not touch the return address. Hence returning from @var{FUNCTION} will
3460return to whoever called the current @samp{thunk}.
3461
3462The effect must be as if @var{function} had been called directly with
3463the adjusted first argument. This macro is responsible for emitting all
3464of the code for a thunk function; @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3465@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} are not invoked.
3466
3467The @var{thunk_fndecl} is redundant. (@var{delta} and @var{function}
3468have already been extracted from it.) It might possibly be useful on
3469some targets, but probably not.
3470
861bb6c1
JL
3471If you do not define this macro, the target-independent code in the C++
3472frontend will generate a less efficient heavyweight thunk that calls
3473@var{function} instead of jumping to it. The generic approach does
3474not support varargs.
feca2ed3
JW
3475@end table
3476
3477@node Profiling
3478@subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3479@cindex profiling, code generation
3480
3481These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3482
3483@table @code
3484@findex FUNCTION_PROFILER
3485@item FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3486A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3487assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3488Before calling, the assembler code must load the address of a
3489counter variable into a register where @code{mcount} expects to
3490find the address. The name of this variable is @samp{LP} followed
3491by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate the name using
3492@samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3493
3494@findex mcount
3495The details of how the address should be passed to @code{mcount} are
a3a15b4d 3496determined by your operating system environment, not by GCC. To
feca2ed3
JW
3497figure them out, compile a small program for profiling using the
3498system's installed C compiler and look at the assembler code that
3499results.
3500
3501@findex PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3502@item PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3503Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3504the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3505
3506@findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER
3507@vindex profile_block_flag
3508@item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3509A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3510assembler code to initialize basic-block profiling for the current
3511object module. The global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag}
956d6950 3512distinguishes two profile modes.
feca2ed3
JW
3513
3514@table @code
3515@findex __bb_init_func
3516@item profile_block_flag != 2
3517Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_func} once per
3518object module, passing it as its sole argument the address of a block
3519allocated in the object module.
3520
3521The name of the block is a local symbol made with this statement:
3522
3523@smallexample
3524ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3525@end smallexample
3526
3527Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3528@code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3529can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3530that you know will result.
3531
3532The first word of this block is a flag which will be nonzero if the
3533object module has already been initialized. So test this word first,
3534and do not call @code{__bb_init_func} if the flag is
3535nonzero. BLOCK_OR_LABEL contains a unique number which may be used to
3536generate a label as a branch destination when @code{__bb_init_func}
3537will not be called.
3538
3539Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3540
3541@example
3542 cmp (LPBX0),0
3543 bne local_label
3544 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3545 call __bb_init_func
3546local_label:
3547@end example
3548
3549@findex __bb_init_trace_func
3550@item profile_block_flag == 2
3551Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_trace_func}
3552and pass two parameters to it. The first parameter is the same as
3553for @code{__bb_init_func}. The second parameter is the number of the
3554first basic block of the function as given by BLOCK_OR_LABEL. Note
3555that @code{__bb_init_trace_func} has to be called, even if the object
3556module has been initialized already.
3557
3558Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3559@example
3560parameter1 <- LPBX0
3561parameter2 <- BLOCK_OR_LABEL
3562call __bb_init_trace_func
3563@end example
3564@end table
3565
3566@findex BLOCK_PROFILER
3567@vindex profile_block_flag
3568@item BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{blockno})
3569A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3570assembler code to increment the count associated with the basic
3571block number @var{blockno}. The global compile flag
956d6950 3572@code{profile_block_flag} distinguishes two profile modes.
feca2ed3
JW
3573
3574@table @code
3575@item profile_block_flag != 2
3576Output code to increment the counter directly. Basic blocks are
3577numbered separately from zero within each compilation. The count
3578associated with block number @var{blockno} is at index
3579@var{blockno} in a vector of words; the name of this array is a local
3580symbol made with this statement:
3581
3582@smallexample
3583ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 2);
3584@end smallexample
3585
3586@c This paragraph is the same as one a few paragraphs up.
3587@c That is not an error.
3588Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3589@code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3590can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3591that you know will result.
3592
3593Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3594
3595@smallexample
3596inc (LPBX2+4*BLOCKNO)
3597@end smallexample
3598
3599@vindex __bb
3600@findex __bb_trace_func
3601@item profile_block_flag == 2
3602Output code to initialize the global structure @code{__bb} and
3603call the function @code{__bb_trace_func}, which will increment the
3604counter.
3605
3606@code{__bb} consists of two words. In the first word, the current
3607basic block number, as given by BLOCKNO, has to be stored. In
3608the second word, the address of a block allocated in the object
3609module has to be stored. The address is given by the label created
3610with this statement:
3611
3612@smallexample
3613ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3614@end smallexample
3615
3616Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3617@example
3618move BLOCKNO -> (__bb)
3619move LPBX0 -> (__bb+4)
3620call __bb_trace_func
3621@end example
3622@end table
3623
3624@findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT
3625@findex __bb_trace_ret
3626@vindex profile_block_flag
3627@item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT (@var{file})
3628A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file}
3629assembler code to call function @code{__bb_trace_ret}. The
3630assembler code should only be output
3631if the global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag} == 2. This
3632macro has to be used at every place where code for returning from
3633a function is generated (e.g. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}). Although
3634you have to write the definition of @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}
3635as well, you have to define this macro to tell the compiler, that
3636the proper call to @code{__bb_trace_ret} is produced.
3637
3638@findex MACHINE_STATE_SAVE
3639@findex __bb_init_trace_func
3640@findex __bb_trace_func
3641@findex __bb_trace_ret
3642@item MACHINE_STATE_SAVE (@var{id})
3643A C statement or compound statement to save all registers, which may
3644be clobbered by a function call, including condition codes. The
3645@code{asm} statement will be mostly likely needed to handle this
3646task. Local labels in the assembler code can be concatenated with the
8760eaae 3647string @var{id}, to obtain a unique label name.
feca2ed3
JW
3648
3649Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3650@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be saved in the macros
3651@code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3652@code{BLOCK_PROFILER} prior calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3653@code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3654
3655@findex MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE
3656@findex __bb_init_trace_func
3657@findex __bb_trace_func
3658@findex __bb_trace_ret
3659@item MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE (@var{id})
3660A C statement or compound statement to restore all registers, including
3661condition codes, saved by @code{MACHINE_STATE_SAVE}.
3662
3663Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3664@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be restored in the macros
3665@code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3666@code{BLOCK_PROFILER} after calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3667@code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3668
3669@findex BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3670@item BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3671A C function or functions which are needed in the library to
3672support block profiling.
3673@end table
3674
b36f4ed3
NC
3675@node Inlining
3676@subsection Permitting inlining of functions with attributes
3677@cindex inlining
3678
3679By default if a function has a target specific attribute attached to it,
3680it will not be inlined. This behaviour can be overridden if the target
3681defines the @samp{FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P} macro. This macro
3682takes one argument, a @samp{DECL} describing the function. It should
3683return non-zero if the function can be inlined, otherwise it should
3684return 0.
3685
feca2ed3
JW
3686@node Varargs
3687@section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3688@cindex varargs implementation
3689
a3a15b4d 3690GCC comes with an implementation of @file{varargs.h} and
feca2ed3
JW
3691@file{stdarg.h} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3692on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3693varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3694conditionals to include it.
3695
3696ANSI @file{stdarg.h} differs from traditional @file{varargs.h} mainly in
3697the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3698implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3699to store the argument pointer. The ANSI implementation of
3700@code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3701supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3702
3703However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3704the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3705below.
3706
3707@table @code
3708@findex __builtin_saveregs
3709@item __builtin_saveregs ()
3710Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3711that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ANSI and traditional
3712versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3713you use @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3714
3715On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3716control of the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On other machines,
3717it calls a routine written in assembler language, found in
3718@file{libgcc2.c}.
3719
3720Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3721beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3722@code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3723This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3724to use them for its own purposes.
3725@c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3726@c 10feb93
3727
3728@findex __builtin_args_info
3729@item __builtin_args_info (@var{category})
3730Use this built-in function to find the first anonymous arguments in
3731registers.
3732
3733In general, a machine may have several categories of registers used for
3734arguments, each for a particular category of data types. (For example,
3735on some machines, floating-point registers are used for floating-point
3736arguments while other arguments are passed in the general registers.)
3737To make non-varargs functions use the proper calling convention, you
3738have defined the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data type to record how many
3739registers in each category have been used so far
3740
3741@code{__builtin_args_info} accesses the same data structure of type
3742@code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} after the ordinary argument layout is finished
3743with it, with @var{category} specifying which word to access. Thus, the
3744value indicates the first unused register in a given category.
3745
3746Normally, you would use @code{__builtin_args_info} in the implementation
3747of @code{va_start}, accessing each category just once and storing the
3748value in the @code{va_list} object. This is because @code{va_list} will
3749have to update the values, and there is no way to alter the
3750values accessed by @code{__builtin_args_info}.
3751
3752@findex __builtin_next_arg
3753@item __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3754This is the equivalent of @code{__builtin_args_info}, for stack
3755arguments. It returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3756argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3757returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3758argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3759fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3760verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3761of the current function.
3762
3763@findex __builtin_classify_type
3764@item __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3765Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3766passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3767has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3768specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3769with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3770
3771@code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3772considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3773kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3774
3775The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3776interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3777@end table
3778
3779These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3780
3781@table @code
3782@findex EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
d3707adb 3783@item EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS ()
feca2ed3
JW
3784If defined, is a C expression that produces the machine-specific code
3785for a call to @code{__builtin_saveregs}. This code will be moved to the
3786very beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.
3787The return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the
3788value to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3789
feca2ed3 3790@findex SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
59d40964 3791@item SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (@var{args_so_far}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{pretend_args_size}, @var{second_time})
feca2ed3
JW
3792This macro offers an alternative to using @code{__builtin_saveregs} and
3793defining the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. Use it to store the
3794anonymous register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments
3795appear to have been passed consecutively on the stack. Once this is
3796done, you can use the standard implementation of varargs that works for
3797machines that pass all their arguments on the stack.
3798
3799The argument @var{args_so_far} is the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
8760eaae 3800structure, containing the values that are obtained after processing the
feca2ed3
JW
3801named arguments. The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
3802last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
3803
3804The macro implementation should do two things: first, push onto the
3805stack all the argument registers @emph{not} used for the named
3806arguments, and second, store the size of the data thus pushed into the
3807@code{int}-valued variable whose name is supplied as the argument
3808@var{pretend_args_size}. The value that you store here will serve as
3809additional offset for setting up the stack frame.
3810
3811Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
3812compile time without knowing their data types,
3813@code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that have just
3814a single category of argument register and use it uniformly for all data
3815types.
3816
3817If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
3818arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time. This
3819happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
3820end of the source file. The macro @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
3821not generate any instructions in this case.
3822
3823@findex STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3824@item STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
e5e809f4
JL
3825Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the location where a function
3826argument is passed depends on whether or not it is a named argument.
feca2ed3
JW
3827
3828This macro controls how the @var{named} argument to @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
e5e809f4
JL
3829is set for varargs and stdarg functions. If this macro returns a
3830nonzero value, the @var{named} argument is always true for named
3831arguments, and false for unnamed arguments. If it returns a value of
3832zero, but @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is defined, then all arguments
3833are treated as named. Otherwise, all named arguments except the last
3834are treated as named.
3835
3836You need not define this macro if it always returns zero.
9ab70a9b
R
3837
3838@findex PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3839@item PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3840If you need to conditionally change ABIs so that one works with
3841@code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS}, but the other works like neither
3842@code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} nor @code{STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING} was
3843defined, then define this macro to return nonzero if
3844@code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is used, zero otherwise.
3845Otherwise, you should not define this macro.
feca2ed3
JW
3846@end table
3847
3848@node Trampolines
3849@section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3850@cindex trampolines for nested functions
3851@cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3852
3853A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3854when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3855the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
a3a15b4d 3856tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
feca2ed3
JW
3857trampoline.
3858
3859The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3860address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3861the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3862two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3863exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3864machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3865two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3866operands.
3867
3868The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3869parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3870immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3871simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3872proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3873may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3874separately.
3875
3876@table @code
3877@findex TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3878@item TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (@var{file})
3879A C statement to output, on the stream @var{file}, assembler code for a
3880block of data that contains the constant parts of a trampoline. This
3881code should not include a label---the label is taken care of
3882automatically.
3883
3884If you do not define this macro, it means no template is needed
3885for the target. Do not define this macro on systems where the block move
3886code to copy the trampoline into place would be larger than the code
3887to generate it on the spot.
3888
3889@findex TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3890@item TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3891The name of a subroutine to switch to the section in which the
3892trampoline template is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is
3893a value of @samp{readonly_data_section}, which places the trampoline in
3894the section containing read-only data.
3895
3896@findex TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3897@item TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3898A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3899
3900@findex TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3901@item TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3902Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3903
3904If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
3905is used for aligning trampolines.
3906
3907@findex INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE
3908@item INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{addr}, @var{fnaddr}, @var{static_chain})
3909A C statement to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
3910@var{addr} is an RTX for the address of the trampoline; @var{fnaddr} is
3911an RTX for the address of the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
3912RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
3913when it is called.
3914
3915@findex ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE
3916@item ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{fp})
3917A C expression to allocate run-time space for a trampoline. The
3918expression value should be an RTX representing a memory reference to the
3919space for the trampoline.
3920
3921@cindex @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} and trampolines
3922@cindex @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and trampolines
3923If this macro is not defined, by default the trampoline is allocated as
3924a stack slot. This default is right for most machines. The exceptions
3925are machines where it is impossible to execute instructions in the stack
3926area. On such machines, you may have to implement a separate stack,
3927using this macro in conjunction with @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3928@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}.
3929
3930@var{fp} points to a data structure, a @code{struct function}, which
3931describes the compilation status of the immediate containing function of
3932the function which the trampoline is for. Normally (when
3933@code{ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE} is not defined), the stack slot for the
3934trampoline is in the stack frame of this containing function. Other
3935allocation strategies probably must do something analogous with this
3936information.
3937@end table
3938
3939Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3940separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3941fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3942jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3943
3944Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3945the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3946make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3947subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3948latter makes initialization faster.
3949
3950To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3951the following macros which describe the shape of the cache.
3952
3953@table @code
3954@findex INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3955@item INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3956The total size in bytes of the cache.
3957
3958@findex INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3959@item INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3960The length in bytes of each cache line. The cache is divided into cache
3961lines which are disjoint slots, each holding a contiguous chunk of data
3962fetched from memory. Each time data is brought into the cache, an
3963entire line is read at once. The data loaded into a cache line is
3964always aligned on a boundary equal to the line size.
3965
3966@findex INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3967@item INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3968The number of alternative cache lines that can hold any particular memory
3969location.
3970@end table
3971
3972Alternatively, if the machine has system calls or instructions to clear
3973the instruction cache directly, you can define the following macro.
3974
3975@table @code
3976@findex CLEAR_INSN_CACHE
3977@item CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{BEG}, @var{END})
3978If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3979cache} in the specified interval. If it is not defined, and the macro
3980INSN_CACHE_SIZE is defined, some generic code is generated to clear the
3981cache. The definition of this macro would typically be a series of
3982@code{asm} statements. Both @var{BEG} and @var{END} are both pointer
3983expressions.
3984@end table
3985
3986To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3987you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3988cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3989beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3990its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3991
3992@table @code
3993@findex TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3994@item TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3995Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3996work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
a3a15b4d 3997which will be compiled with GCC. They go in a library function named
feca2ed3
JW
3998@code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3999
4000If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
4001C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
4002special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
4003statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
4004global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
4005special assembler code.
4006@end table
4007
4008@node Library Calls
4009@section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
4010@cindex library subroutine names
4011@cindex @file{libgcc.a}
4012
4013@c prevent bad page break with this line
4014Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
4015
4016@table @code
4017@findex MULSI3_LIBCALL
4018@item MULSI3_LIBCALL
4019A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4020multiplication of one signed full-word by another. If you do not
4021define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__mulsi3},
4022a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4023
4024@findex DIVSI3_LIBCALL
4025@item DIVSI3_LIBCALL
4026A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4027division of one signed full-word by another. If you do not define
4028this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divsi3}, a
4029function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4030
4031@findex UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
4032@item UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
4033A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4034division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
4035this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivsi3}, a
4036function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4037
4038@findex MODSI3_LIBCALL
4039@item MODSI3_LIBCALL
4040A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4041remainder in division of one signed full-word by another. If you do
4042not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4043@code{__modsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4044
4045@findex UMODSI3_LIBCALL
4046@item UMODSI3_LIBCALL
4047A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4048remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4049not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4050@code{__umodsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4051
4052@findex MULDI3_LIBCALL
4053@item MULDI3_LIBCALL
4054A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4055multiplication of one signed double-word by another. If you do not
4056define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__muldi3},
4057a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4058
4059@findex DIVDI3_LIBCALL
4060@item DIVDI3_LIBCALL
4061A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4062division of one signed double-word by another. If you do not define
4063this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divdi3}, a
4064function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4065
4066@findex UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
4067@item UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
4068A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4069division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
4070this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivdi3}, a
4071function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4072
4073@findex MODDI3_LIBCALL
4074@item MODDI3_LIBCALL
4075A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4076remainder in division of one signed double-word by another. If you do
4077not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4078@code{__moddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4079
4080@findex UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4081@item UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4082A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4083remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4084not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4085@code{__umoddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4086
4087@findex INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4088@item INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4089Define this macro as a C statement that declares additional library
4090routines renames existing ones. @code{init_optabs} calls this macro after
4091initializing all the normal library routines.
4092
c5c60e15
BS
4093@findex FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4094@item FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL
4095Define this macro as a C statement that returns nonzero if a call to
4096the floating point comparison library function will return a boolean
4097value that indicates the result of the comparison. It should return
4098zero if one of gcc's own libgcc functions is called.
4099
4100Most ports don't need to define this macro.
4101
feca2ed3
JW
4102@findex TARGET_EDOM
4103@cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4104@item TARGET_EDOM
4105The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
a3a15b4d 4106expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
feca2ed3
JW
4107deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4108@file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4109system.
4110
4111If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4112domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4113error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4114there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4115that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4116
4117@findex GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4118@cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4119@item GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4120Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4121refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4122@code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4123macro, a reasonable default is used.
4124
4125@findex TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4126@cindex @code{bcopy}, implicit usage
4127@cindex @code{memcpy}, implicit usage
4128@cindex @code{bzero}, implicit usage
4129@cindex @code{memset}, implicit usage
4130@item TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
a3a15b4d 4131Define this macro if GCC should generate calls to the System V
feca2ed3
JW
4132(and ANSI C) library functions @code{memcpy} and @code{memset}
4133rather than the BSD functions @code{bcopy} and @code{bzero}.
4134
4135@findex LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4136@item LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4137Define this macro if only @code{float} arguments cannot be passed to
4138library routines (so they must be converted to @code{double}). This
4139macro affects both how library calls are generated and how the library
4140routines in @file{libgcc1.c} accept their arguments. It is useful on
4141machines where floating and fixed point arguments are passed
4142differently, such as the i860.
4143
4144@findex FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4145@item FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4146Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4147pick up arguments of type @code{float}. (By default, they use a union
4148of @code{float} and @code{int}.)
4149
4150The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4151traditional C compilers that expect all arguments declared as @code{float}
4152to arrive as @code{double}. To avoid this conversion, the library routines
4153ask for the value as some other type and then treat it as a @code{float}.
4154
4155On some systems, no other type will work for this. For these systems,
4156you must use @code{LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE} instead, to force conversion of
4157the values @code{double} before they are passed.
4158
4159@findex FLOATIFY
4160@item FLOATIFY (@var{passed-value})
4161Define this macro to override the way library routines redesignate a
4162@code{float} argument as a @code{float} instead of the type it was
4163passed as. The default is an expression which takes the @code{float}
4164field of the union.
4165
4166@findex FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4167@item FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4168Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4169return values that ought to have type @code{float}. (By default, they
4170use @code{int}.)
4171
4172The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4173traditional C compilers gratuitously convert values declared as
4174@code{float} into @code{double}.
4175
4176@findex INTIFY
4177@item INTIFY (@var{float-value})
4178Define this macro to override the way the value of a
4179@code{float}-returning library routine should be packaged in order to
4180return it. These functions are actually declared to return type
4181@code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} (normally @code{int}).
4182
4183These values can't be returned as type @code{float} because traditional
4184C compilers would gratuitously convert the value to a @code{double}.
4185
4186A local variable named @code{intify} is always available when the macro
4187@code{INTIFY} is used. It is a union of a @code{float} field named
4188@code{f} and a field named @code{i} whose type is
4189@code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} or @code{int}.
4190
4191If you don't define this macro, the default definition works by copying
4192the value through that union.
4193
4194@findex nongcc_SI_type
4195@item nongcc_SI_type
4196Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to
4197@code{SImode} in the system's own C compiler.
4198
4199You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4200is.
4201
4202@findex nongcc_word_type
4203@item nongcc_word_type
4204Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to the
4205word_mode in the system's own C compiler.
4206
4207You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4208is.
4209
4210@findex perform_@dots{}
4211@item perform_@dots{}
4212Define these macros to supply explicit C statements to carry out various
4213arithmetic operations on types @code{float} and @code{double} in the
4214library routines in @file{libgcc1.c}. See that file for a full list
4215of these macros and their arguments.
4216
4217On most machines, you don't need to define any of these macros, because
4218the C compiler that comes with the system takes care of doing them.
4219
4220@findex NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4221@item NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4222Define this macro to generate code for Objective C message sending using
4223the calling convention of the NeXT system. This calling convention
4224involves passing the object, the selector and the method arguments all
4225at once to the method-lookup library function.
4226
4227The default calling convention passes just the object and the selector
4228to the lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4229@end table
4230
4231@node Addressing Modes
4232@section Addressing Modes
4233@cindex addressing modes
4234
4235@c prevent bad page break with this line
4236This is about addressing modes.
4237
4238@table @code
4239@findex HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4240@item HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
940da324 4241A C expression that is nonzero the machine supports post-increment addressing.
feca2ed3
JW
4242
4243@findex HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4244@findex HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4245@findex HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4246@item HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4247@itemx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4248@itemx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4249Similar for other kinds of addressing.
4250
4251@findex CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P
4252@item CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4253A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4254is a valid address. On most machines, this can be defined as
4255@code{CONSTANT_P (@var{x})}, but a few machines are more restrictive
4256in which constant addresses are supported.
4257
4258@findex CONSTANT_P
4259@code{CONSTANT_P} accepts integer-values expressions whose values are
4260not explicitly known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and
4261@code{high} expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in
4262addition to @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4263
4264@findex MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4265@item MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4266A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4267memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4268the maximum number that @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} would ever
4269accept.
4270
4271@findex GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS
4272@item GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
4273A C compound statement with a conditional @code{goto @var{label};}
4274executed if @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory address on the
4275target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
4276
4277It usually pays to define several simpler macros to serve as
4278subroutines for this one. Otherwise it may be too complicated to
4279understand.
4280
4281This macro must exist in two variants: a strict variant and a
4282non-strict one. The strict variant is used in the reload pass. It
4283must be defined so that any pseudo-register that has not been
4284allocated a hard register is considered a memory reference. In
4285contexts where some kind of register is required, a pseudo-register
4286with no hard register must be rejected.
4287
4288The non-strict variant is used in other passes. It must be defined to
4289accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
4290register is required.
4291
4292@findex REG_OK_STRICT
4293Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
4294macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}. You should use an
4295@code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant
4296in that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
4297
4298Subroutines to check for acceptable registers for various purposes (one
4299for base registers, one for index registers, and so on) are typically
4300among the subroutines used to define @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.
4301Then only these subroutine macros need have two variants; the higher
4302levels of macros may be the same whether strict or not.@refill
4303
4304Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
4305and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
4306constant. Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
4307specifically as legitimate addresses. Normally you would simply
4308recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
4309
4310Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
4311sums that are not marked with @code{const}. It assumes that a naked
4312@code{plus} indicates indexing. If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
4313naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
4314be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4315
4316@cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
4317On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
4318the section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the
4319macro @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
4320@code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. When you see a
4321@code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
4322@code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section. @xref{Assembler
4323Format}.
4324
4325@findex saveable_obstack
4326The best way to modify the name string is by adding text to the
4327beginning, with suitable punctuation to prevent any ambiguity. Allocate
4328the new name in @code{saveable_obstack}. You will have to modify
4329@code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to remove and decode the added text and
4330output the name accordingly, and define @code{STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} to
4331access the original name string.
4332
4333You can check the information stored here into the @code{symbol_ref} in
4334the definitions of the macros @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and
4335@code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4336
4337@findex REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4338@item REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x})
4339A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4340RTX) is valid for use as a base register. For hard registers, it
4341should always accept those which the hardware permits and reject the
4342others. Whether the macro accepts or rejects pseudo registers must be
4343controlled by @code{REG_OK_STRICT} as described above. This usually
4344requires two variant definitions, of which @code{REG_OK_STRICT}
4345controls the one actually used.
4346
861bb6c1
JL
4347@findex REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4348@item REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x}, @var{mode})
4349A C expression that is just like @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
4350that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
4351@var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
4352reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
4353you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
4354@code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
4355
feca2ed3
JW
4356@findex REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
4357@item REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{x})
4358A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4359RTX) is valid for use as an index register.
4360
4361The difference between an index register and a base register is that
4362the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
4363two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
4364labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
4365labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
4366may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
4367looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
4368only if neither labeling works.
4369
4370@findex LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4371@item LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{oldx}, @var{mode}, @var{win})
4372A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x} with a valid
4373memory address for an operand of mode @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a
4374C statement label elsewhere in the code; the macro definition may use
4375
4376@example
4377GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{win});
4378@end example
4379
4380@noindent
4381to avoid further processing if the address has become legitimate.
4382
4383@findex break_out_memory_refs
4384@var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
4385and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
4386@var{x}.
4387
4388The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
4389@var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4390should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4391
4392It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4393address. The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases. In
4394fact, it is safe for this macro to do nothing. But often a
4395machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4396
a9a2595b
JR
4397@findex LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4398@item LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4399A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4400that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4401@var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4402It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4403performance reasons.
4404
4405For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4406reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4407registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4408processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4409needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4410LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4411generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4412be shared.
4413
39bdfaa0
RH
4414@emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4415to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4416and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4417of reload internals.
a9a2595b 4418
5f0c590d
JL
4419@emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4420previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4421then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4422
a9a2595b 4423@findex push_reload
39bdfaa0
RH
4424The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4425need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4426suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
a9a2595b 4427
39bdfaa0 4428The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
a9a2595b
JR
4429@var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4430should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4431This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4432@code{push_reload}.
4433
39bdfaa0
RH
4434@findex strict_memory_address_p
4435The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4436the address has become legitimate.
4437
a9a2595b
JR
4438@findex copy_rtx
4439If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4440this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that is unshares only a
4441single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4442top level, you'll need to replace first the top leve
4443It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4444address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4445
feca2ed3
JW
4446@findex GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS
4447@item GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
4448A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
4449@var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
4450different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
4451reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
4452but not others.
4453
4454Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
4455effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
4456of the operand being addressed. Some machines have other mode-dependent
4457addresses. Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
4458
4459You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
4460
4461@findex LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4462@item LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4463A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for
4464an immediate operand on the target machine. You can assume that
4465@var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this. In fact,
4466@samp{1} is a suitable definition for this macro on machines where
4467anything @code{CONSTANT_P} is valid.@refill
4468@end table
4469
4470@node Condition Code
4471@section Condition Code Status
4472@cindex condition code status
4473
4474@c prevent bad page break with this line
4475This describes the condition code status.
4476
4477@findex cc_status
4478The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4479describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4480the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4481variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4482currently based, and several standard flags.
4483
4484Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4485description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4486information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4487
4488@table @code
4489@findex CC_STATUS_MDEP
4490@item CC_STATUS_MDEP
4491C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4492component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4493
4494This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4495
4496@findex CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4497@item CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4498A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4499The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4500the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4501define this macro to initialize it.
4502
4503This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4504
4505@findex NOTICE_UPDATE_CC
4506@item NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4507A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4508appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4509this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4510code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4511set @code{(cc0)}.
4512
4513This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4514
4515If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4516other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4517invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4518reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4519registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4520@code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4521insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4522based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4523value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4524this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4525@samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4526@code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4527condition code value.
4528
4529The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4530with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4531@code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4532constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4533insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4534@code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4535@code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4536
4537A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4538that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4539@samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4540two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4541
4542@findex EXTRA_CC_MODES
4543@item EXTRA_CC_MODES
aa0b4465
ZW
4544A list of additional modes for condition code values in registers
4545(@pxref{Jump Patterns}). This macro should expand to a sequence of
4546calls of the macro @code{CC} separated by white space. @code{CC} takes
4547two arguments. The first is the enumeration name of the mode, which
4548should begin with @samp{CC} and end with @samp{mode}. The second is a C
4549string giving the printable name of the mode; it should be the same as
4550the first argument, but with the trailing @samp{mode} removed.
feca2ed3 4551
aa0b4465 4552You should only define this macro if additional modes are required.
feca2ed3 4553
aa0b4465 4554A sample definition of @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is:
feca2ed3 4555@smallexample
aa0b4465
ZW
4556#define EXTRA_CC_MODES \
4557 CC(CC_NOOVmode, "CC_NOOV") \
4558 CC(CCFPmode, "CCFP") \
4559 CC(CCFPEmode, "CCFPE")
feca2ed3
JW
4560@end smallexample
4561
feca2ed3
JW
4562@findex SELECT_CC_MODE
4563@item SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4564Returns a mode from class @code{MODE_CC} to be used when comparison
4565operation code @var{op} is applied to rtx @var{x} and @var{y}. For
4566example, on the Sparc, @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} is defined as (see
4567@pxref{Jump Patterns} for a description of the reason for this
4568definition)
4569
4570@smallexample
4571#define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4572 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4573 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4574 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4575 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4576 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4577@end smallexample
4578
4579You need not define this macro if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4580
4581@findex CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4582@item CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON (@var{code}, @var{op0}, @var{op1})
8760eaae 4583On some machines not all possible comparisons are defined, but you can
feca2ed3
JW
4584convert an invalid comparison into a valid one. For example, the Alpha
4585does not have a @code{GT} comparison, but you can use an @code{LT}
4586comparison instead and swap the order of the operands.
4587
4588On such machines, define this macro to be a C statement to do any
4589required conversions. @var{code} is the initial comparison code
4590and @var{op0} and @var{op1} are the left and right operands of the
4591comparison, respectively. You should modify @var{code}, @var{op0}, and
4592@var{op1} as required.
4593
a3a15b4d 4594GCC will not assume that the comparison resulting from this macro is
feca2ed3
JW
4595valid but will see if the resulting insn matches a pattern in the
4596@file{md} file.
4597
4598You need not define this macro if it would never change the comparison
4599code or operands.
4600
4601@findex REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE
4602@item REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4603A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4604comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4605can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4606then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4607
4608You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4609floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4610For example, here is the definition used on the Sparc, where floating-point
4611inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4612
4613@smallexample
4614#define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4615@end smallexample
4616
4617@end table
4618
4619@node Costs
4620@section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4621@cindex costs of instructions
4622@cindex relative costs
4623@cindex speed of instructions
4624
4625These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4626on the target machine.
4627
4628@table @code
4629@findex CONST_COSTS
4630@item CONST_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4631A part of a C @code{switch} statement that describes the relative costs
4632of constant RTL expressions. It must contain @code{case} labels for
4633expression codes @code{const_int}, @code{const}, @code{symbol_ref},
4634@code{label_ref} and @code{const_double}. Each case must ultimately
4635reach a @code{return} statement to return the relative cost of the use
4636of that kind of constant value in an expression. The cost may depend on
4637the precise value of the constant, which is available for examination in
4638@var{x}, and the rtx code of the expression in which it is contained,
4639found in @var{outer_code}.
4640
4641@var{code} is the expression code---redundant, since it can be
4642obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
4643
4644@findex RTX_COSTS
4645@findex COSTS_N_INSNS
4646@item RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4647Like @code{CONST_COSTS} but applies to nonconstant RTL expressions.
4648This can be used, for example, to indicate how costly a multiply
4649instruction is. In writing this macro, you can use the construct
4650@code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
4651instructions. @var{outer_code} is the code of the expression in which
4652@var{x} is contained.
4653
4654This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4655are adequate for the target machine.
4656
8625fab5
KG
4657@findex DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS
4658@item DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4659This macro, if defined, is called for any case not handled by the
4660@code{RTX_COSTS} or @code{CONST_COSTS} macros. This eliminates the need
4661to put case labels into the macro, but the code, or any functions it
4662calls, must assume that the RTL in @var{x} could be of any type that has
4663not already been handled. The arguments are the same as for
4664@code{RTX_COSTS}, and the macro should execute a return statement giving
4665the cost of any RTL expressions that it can handle. The default cost
4666calculation is used for any RTL for which this macro does not return a
4667value.
4668
4669This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4670are adequate for the target machine.
4671
feca2ed3
JW
4672@findex ADDRESS_COST
4673@item ADDRESS_COST (@var{address})
4674An expression giving the cost of an addressing mode that contains
4675@var{address}. If not defined, the cost is computed from
4676the @var{address} expression and the @code{CONST_COSTS} values.
4677
4678For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
4679true cost of the addressing mode. However, on RISC machines, all
4680instructions normally have the same length and execution time. Hence
4681all addresses will have equal costs.
4682
4683In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
4684the lowest cost will be used. If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
4685cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
4686
4687For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
4688and a constant is used twice in the same basic block. When this macro
4689is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
4690references will be indirect through that register. On machines where
4691the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
4692that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
4693instruction and possibly require an additional register. Proper
4694specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
4695
4696Similar use of this macro is made in strength reduction of loops.
4697
4698@var{address} need not be valid as an address. In such a case, the cost
4699is not relevant and can be any value; invalid addresses need not be
4700assigned a different cost.
4701
4702On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
4703cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
4704@code{ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to be live
4705over a region of code where only one would have been if
4706@code{ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner. This effect should
4707be considered in the definition of this macro. Equivalent costs should
4708probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of registers
4709on machines with lots of registers.
4710
4711This macro will normally either not be defined or be defined as a
4712constant.
4713
4714@findex REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4715@item REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{from}, @var{to})
4716A C expression for the cost of moving data from a register in class
4717@var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are expressed using
4718the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A value of 2 is the
4719default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4720
4721It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4722same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4723registers if they are not general registers.
4724
4725If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4726hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4727classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4728constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4729allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4730if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4731
4732@findex MEMORY_MOVE_COST
cbd5b9a2
KR
4733@item MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4734A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4735register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
473fe49b
KR
4736is to be written to memory, non-zero if it is to be read in. This cost
4737is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4738registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4739should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4740
a3a15b4d 4741If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
38e01259 4742the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
473fe49b
KR
4743needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4744between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4745more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4746reflect the actual cost of the move.
4747
a3a15b4d 4748GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
473fe49b
KR
4749secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4750a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4751secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
47524 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4753value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4754are the same as to this macro.
cbd5b9a2 4755
feca2ed3
JW
4756@findex BRANCH_COST
4757@item BRANCH_COST
4758A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4759the default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4760@end table
4761
4762Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
a3a15b4d 4763but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
feca2ed3
JW
4764ordinarily expect.
4765
4766@table @code
4767@findex SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4768@item SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4769Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4770than a word of memory (i.e. a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4771faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4772require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4773between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4774
4775When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4776finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4777load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4778faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4779may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4780other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4781
4782@findex SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4783@item SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4784Define this macro if zero-extension (of a @code{char} or @code{short}
4785to an @code{int}) can be done faster if the destination is a register
4786that is known to be zero.
4787
4788If you define this macro, you must have instruction patterns that
4789recognize RTL structures like this:
4790
4791@smallexample
4792(set (strict_low_part (subreg:QI (reg:SI @dots{}) 0)) @dots{})
4793@end smallexample
4794
4795@noindent
4796and likewise for @code{HImode}.
4797
4798@findex SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
5fad8ebf
DE
4799@item SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4800Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4801@var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4802than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4803handler.
feca2ed3
JW
4804
4805When this macro is non-zero, the compiler will act as if
4806@code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were non-zero when generating code for block
4807moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4808Therefore, do not set this macro non-zero if unaligned accesses only add a
4809cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4810
6be57663
DE
4811If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4812this macro is defined, it should produce a non-zero value when
4813@code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is non-zero.
feca2ed3
JW
4814
4815@findex DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4816@item DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4817Define this macro to inhibit strength reduction of memory addresses.
4818(On some machines, such strength reduction seems to do harm rather
4819than good.)
4820
4821@findex MOVE_RATIO
4822@item MOVE_RATIO
9862dea9 4823The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
c5c76735 4824which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
feca2ed3
JW
4825string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4826make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4827
c5c76735
JL
4828Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4829@code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4830the number of such sequences.
9862dea9 4831
feca2ed3
JW
4832If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4833
fbe1758d
AM
4834@findex MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
4835@item MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
4836A C expression used to determine whether @code{move_by_pieces} will be used to
4837copy a chunk of memory, or whether some other block move mechanism
6e01bd94 4838will be used. Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
fbe1758d
AM
4839than @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4840
4841@findex MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4842@item MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4843A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
6e01bd94 4844a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
fbe1758d
AM
4845
4846@findex USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT
4847@item USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
6e01bd94
MH
4848A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4849thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4850@code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4851
4852@findex USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT
4853@item USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4854A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4855thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4856@code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
fbe1758d
AM
4857
4858@findex USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT
4859@item USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
6e01bd94
MH
4860A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4861thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4862@code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4863
4864@findex USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT
4865@item USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4866A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4867thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4868@code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
fbe1758d
AM
4869
4870@findex USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT
4871@item USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
6e01bd94
MH
4872A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4873thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4874@code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4875
4876@findex USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT
4877@item USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4878A C expression used to determine whether a store postdeccrement is a good
4879thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4880@code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
fbe1758d
AM
4881
4882@findex USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT
4883@item USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
6e01bd94
MH
4884This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4885thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4886@code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4887
4888@findex USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT
4889@item USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4890This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4891thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4892@code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
fbe1758d 4893
feca2ed3
JW
4894@findex NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4895@item NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4896Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4897function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4898
4899@findex NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4900@item NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4901Define this macro if it is as good or better for a function to call
4902itself with an explicit address than to call an address kept in a
4903register.
4904
4905@findex ADJUST_COST
4906@item ADJUST_COST (@var{insn}, @var{link}, @var{dep_insn}, @var{cost})
4907A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer variable @var{cost}
4908based on the relationship between @var{insn} that is dependent on
4909@var{dep_insn} through the dependence @var{link}. The default is to
4910make no adjustment to @var{cost}. This can be used for example to
4911specify to the scheduler that an output- or anti-dependence does not
4912incur the same cost as a data-dependence.
4913
4914@findex ADJUST_PRIORITY
4915@item ADJUST_PRIORITY (@var{insn})
4916A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer scheduling
4917priority @code{INSN_PRIORITY(@var{insn})}. Reduce the priority
4918to execute the @var{insn} earlier, increase the priority to execute
4919@var{insn} later. Do not define this macro if you do not need to
4920adjust the scheduling priorities of insns.
4921@end table
4922
4923@node Sections
4924@section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4925@c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4926@c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4927
4928An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4929data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4930section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4931section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4932section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4933of sections.
4934
4935The compiler must tell the assembler when to switch sections. These
4936macros control what commands to output to tell the assembler this. You
4937can also define additional sections.
4938
4939@table @code
4940@findex TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4941@item TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4942A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4943operation that should precede instructions and read-only data. Normally
4944@code{".text"} is right.
4945
4946@findex DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4947@item DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4948A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4949operation to identify the following data as writable initialized data.
4950Normally @code{".data"} is right.
4951
4952@findex SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4953@item SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4954If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4955assembler operation to identify the following data as shared data. If
4956not defined, @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP} will be used.
4957
4958@findex BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4959@item BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4960If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4961assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4962data. If not defined, and neither @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} nor
4963@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are defined, uninitialized global data will be
4964output in the data section if @samp{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise
4965@code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be used.
4966
4967@findex SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4968@item SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4969If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4970assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4971shared data. If not defined, and @code{BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP} is, the latter
4972will be used.
4973
4974@findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4975@item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4976If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4977assembler operation to identify the following data as initialization
a3a15b4d 4978code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does not
feca2ed3
JW
4979exist.
4980
4981@findex EXTRA_SECTIONS
4982@findex in_text
4983@findex in_data
4984@item EXTRA_SECTIONS
4985A list of names for sections other than the standard two, which are
4986@code{in_text} and @code{in_data}. You need not define this macro
4987on a system with no other sections (that GCC needs to use).
4988
4989@findex EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4990@findex text_section
4991@findex data_section
4992@item EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4993One or more functions to be defined in @file{varasm.c}. These
4994functions should do jobs analogous to those of @code{text_section} and
4995@code{data_section}, for your additional sections. Do not define this
4996macro if you do not define @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}.
4997
4998@findex READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4999@item READONLY_DATA_SECTION
5000On most machines, read-only variables, constants, and jump tables are
5001placed in the text section. If this is not the case on your machine,
5002this macro should be defined to be the name of a function (either
5003@code{data_section} or a function defined in @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}) that
5004switches to the section to be used for read-only items.
5005
5006If these items should be placed in the text section, this macro should
5007not be defined.
5008
5009@findex SELECT_SECTION
5010@item SELECT_SECTION (@var{exp}, @var{reloc})
5011A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
5012output of @var{exp}. You can assume that @var{exp} is either a
5013@code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of some sort. @var{reloc}
5014indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5015relocations. Select the section by calling @code{text_section} or one
5016of the alternatives for other sections.
5017
5018Do not define this macro if you put all read-only variables and
5019constants in the read-only data section (usually the text section).
5020
5021@findex SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5022@item SELECT_RTX_SECTION (@var{mode}, @var{rtx})
5023A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
5024output of @var{rtx} in mode @var{mode}. You can assume that @var{rtx}
5025is some kind of constant in RTL. The argument @var{mode} is redundant
5026except in the case of a @code{const_int} rtx. Select the section by
5027calling @code{text_section} or one of the alternatives for other
5028sections.
5029
5030Do not define this macro if you put all constants in the read-only
5031data section.
5032
5033@findex JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5034@item JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
75197b37
BS
5035Define this macro to be an expression with a non-zero value if jump
5036tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
5037section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
5038readonly data section is used.
feca2ed3
JW
5039
5040This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
5041
5042@findex ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5043@item ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (@var{decl})
5044Define this macro if references to a symbol must be treated differently
5045depending on something about the variable or function named by the
5046symbol (such as what section it is in).
5047
5048The macro definition, if any, is executed immediately after the rtl for
5049@var{decl} has been created and stored in @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}.
5050The value of the rtl will be a @code{mem} whose address is a
5051@code{symbol_ref}.
5052
5053@cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
5054The usual thing for this macro to do is to record a flag in the
5055@code{symbol_ref} (such as @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}) or to store a
5056modified name string in the @code{symbol_ref} (if one bit is not enough
5057information).
5058
5059@findex STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5060@item STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (@var{var}, @var{sym_name})
5061Decode @var{sym_name} and store the real name part in @var{var}, sans
5062the characters that encode section info. Define this macro if
5063@code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} alters the symbol's name string.
5064
e9a25f70 5065@findex UNIQUE_SECTION_P
861bb6c1
JL
5066@item UNIQUE_SECTION_P (@var{decl})
5067A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{decl} should be placed
5068into a unique section for some target-specific reason. If you do not
5069define this macro, the default is @samp{0}. Note that the flag
5070@samp{-ffunction-sections} will also cause functions to be placed into
5071unique sections.
5072
feca2ed3 5073@findex UNIQUE_SECTION
861bb6c1
JL
5074@item UNIQUE_SECTION (@var{decl}, @var{reloc})
5075A C statement to build up a unique section name, expressed as a
5076STRING_CST node, and assign it to @samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
5077@var{reloc} indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires
a3a15b4d 5078link-time relocations. If you do not define this macro, GCC will use
a56e7c08
NC
5079the symbol name prefixed by @samp{.} as the section name. Note - this
5080macro can now be called for unitialised data items as well as
5081initialised data and functions.
feca2ed3
JW
5082@end table
5083
5084@node PIC
5085@section Position Independent Code
5086@cindex position independent code
5087@cindex PIC
5088
5089This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5090independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5091generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the macros
5092@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as
5093well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You must modify the definition of
5094@samp{movsi} to do something appropriate when the source operand
5095contains a symbolic address. You may also need to alter the handling of
5096switch statements so that they use relative addresses.
5097@c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5098@c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5099
5100@table @code
5101@findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5102@item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5103The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5104data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5105processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI). When this macro
5106is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5107pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5108is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5109necessary).
5110
5111@findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5112@item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5113Define this macro if the register defined by
5114@code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. Do not define
ed4db1ee 5115this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
feca2ed3
JW
5116
5117@findex FINALIZE_PIC
5118@item FINALIZE_PIC
5119By generating position-independent code, when two different programs (A
5120and B) share a common library (libC.a), the text of the library can be
5121shared whether or not the library is linked at the same address for both
5122programs. In some of these environments, position-independent code
5123requires not only the use of different addressing modes, but also
5124special code to enable the use of these addressing modes.
5125
5126The @code{FINALIZE_PIC} macro serves as a hook to emit these special
5127codes once the function is being compiled into assembly code, but not
5128before. (It is not done before, because in the case of compiling an
5129inline function, it would lead to multiple PIC prologues being
5130included in functions which used inline functions and were compiled to
5131assembly language.)
5132
5133@findex LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
5134@item LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5135A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5136operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5137You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5138check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5139check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5140(including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5141position independent code.
5142@end table
5143
5144@node Assembler Format
5145@section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5146
5147This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5148to write instructions in assembler language--rather than what the
5149instructions do.
5150
5151@menu
5152* File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5153* Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5154* Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5155* Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5156* Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5157 and termination routines.
5158* Macros for Initialization::
5159 Specific macros that control the handling of
5160 initialization and termination routines.
5161* Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5162* Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5163* Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5164* Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5165@end menu
5166
5167@node File Framework
5168@subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5169@cindex assembler format
5170@cindex output of assembler code
5171
5172@c prevent bad page break with this line
5173This describes the overall framework of an assembler file.
5174
5175@table @code
5176@findex ASM_FILE_START
5177@item ASM_FILE_START (@var{stream})
5178A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5179some appropriate text to go at the start of an assembler file.
5180
5181Normally this macro is defined to output a line containing
5182@samp{#NO_APP}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5183assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it can save time by not
5184checking for certain assembler constructs.
5185
5186On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5187see @file{attasm.h}.
5188
5189@findex ASM_FILE_END
5190@item ASM_FILE_END (@var{stream})
5191A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5192some appropriate text to go at the end of an assembler file.
5193
5194If this macro is not defined, the default is to output nothing
5195special at the end of the file. Most systems don't require any
5196definition.
5197
5198On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5199see @file{attasm.h}.
5200
5201@findex ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC
5202@item ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC (@var{file})
5203A C statement to output assembler commands which will identify
a3a15b4d 5204the object file as having been compiled with GCC (or another
feca2ed3
JW
5205GNU compiler).
5206
5207If you don't define this macro, the string @samp{gcc_compiled.:}
5208is output. This string is calculated to define a symbol which,
5209on BSD systems, will never be defined for any other reason.
5210GDB checks for the presence of this symbol when reading the
5211symbol table of an executable.
5212
5213On non-BSD systems, you must arrange communication with GDB in
5214some other fashion. If GDB is not used on your system, you can
5215define this macro with an empty body.
5216
5217@findex ASM_COMMENT_START
5218@item ASM_COMMENT_START
5219A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5220assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5221the end of the line.
5222
5223@findex ASM_APP_ON
5224@item ASM_APP_ON
5225A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5226statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5227@code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5228assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5229that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5230
5231@findex ASM_APP_OFF
5232@item ASM_APP_OFF
5233A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5234statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5235@code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5236time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5237
5238@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5239@item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5240A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5241which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5242the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5243
5244This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5245for the file format in use is appropriate.
5246
e9a25f70 5247@findex OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING
8760eaae 5248@item OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
e9a25f70
JL
5249A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5250@var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
a3a15b4d 5251in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
e9a25f70
JL
5252the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5253of the filename using this macro.
5254
feca2ed3
JW
5255@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE
5256@item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
5257A C statement to output DBX or SDB debugging information before code
5258for line number @var{line} of the current source file to the
5259stdio stream @var{stream}.
5260
5261This macro need not be defined if the standard form of debugging
5262information for the debugger in use is appropriate.
5263
5264@findex ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5265@item ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5266A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
5267@samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}. If this
5268macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
5269
5270@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME
861bb6c1 5271@item ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{reloc})
feca2ed3
JW
5272A C statement to output something to the assembler file to switch to section
5273@var{name} for object @var{decl} which is either a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, a
861bb6c1
JL
5274@code{VAR_DECL} or @code{NULL_TREE}. @var{reloc}
5275indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5276relocations. Some target formats do not support
feca2ed3
JW
5277arbitrary sections. Do not define this macro in such cases.
5278
5279At present this macro is only used to support section attributes.
5280When this macro is undefined, section attributes are disabled.
5281
5282@findex OBJC_PROLOGUE
5283@item OBJC_PROLOGUE
5284A C statement to output any assembler statements which are required to
5285precede any Objective C object definitions or message sending. The
5286statement is executed only when compiling an Objective C program.
5287@end table
5288
5289@need 2000
5290@node Data Output
5291@subsection Output of Data
5292
5293@c prevent bad page break with this line
5294This describes data output.
5295
5296@table @code
5297@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE
5298@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE
5299@findex ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT
5300@item ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5301@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5302@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5303@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_THREE_QUARTER_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5304@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5305@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5306A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5307instruction to assemble a floating-point constant of @code{TFmode},
5308@code{DFmode}, @code{SFmode}, @code{TQFmode}, @code{HFmode}, or
5309@code{QFmode}, respectively, whose value is @var{value}. @var{value}
5310will be a C expression of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. Macros such as
5311@code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE} are useful for writing these
5312definitions.
5313
5314@findex ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT
5315@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT
5316@findex ASM_OUTPUT_INT
5317@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT
5318@findex ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR
5319@findex output_addr_const
5320@item ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5321@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5322@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5323@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5324@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5325A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5326instruction to assemble an integer of 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1 bytes,
5327respectively, whose value is @var{value}. The argument @var{exp} will
5328be an RTL expression which represents a constant value. Use
5329@samp{output_addr_const (@var{stream}, @var{exp})} to output this value
5330as an assembler expression.@refill
5331
5332For sizes larger than @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, if the action of a macro
5333would be identical to repeatedly calling the macro corresponding to
5334a size of @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, once for each word, you need not define
5335the macro.
5336
5337@findex ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE
5338@item ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5339A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5340instruction to assemble a single byte containing the number @var{value}.
5341
5342@findex ASM_BYTE_OP
5343@item ASM_BYTE_OP
5344A C string constant giving the pseudo-op to use for a sequence of
5345single-byte constants. If this macro is not defined, the default is
5346@code{"byte"}.
5347
5348@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII
5349@item ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5350A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5351instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5352bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5353@code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5354
5355If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5356Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5357@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5358
861bb6c1
JL
5359@findex CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5360@item CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5361You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
a3a15b4d 5362expression to have a non-zero value if GCC should output the constant
861bb6c1 5363pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
a3a15b4d
JL
5364GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5365not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
861bb6c1
JL
5366pool before the function.
5367
feca2ed3 5368@findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE
8760eaae 5369@item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
feca2ed3
JW
5370A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5371constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5372the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5373be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5374is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5375immediately after this call.
5376
5377If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5378not be defined.
5379
5380@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY
5381@item ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5382A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5383constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5384anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5385
5386The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5387assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5388output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5389@samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5390@var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5391alignment.
5392
5393The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5394the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5395responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5396Here is how to do this:
5397
5398@example
5399ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5400@end example
5401
5402When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5403@code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5404entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5405
5406You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5407
861bb6c1
JL
5408@findex CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P
5409@item CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P (@var{exp})
5410Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if the constant
5411@var{exp}, of type @code{tree}, should be output after the code for a
5412function. The compiler will normally output all constants before the
5413function; you need not define this macro if this is OK.
5414
5415@findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE
5416@item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5417A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5418pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5419function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5420obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
a3a15b4d 5421constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
861bb6c1
JL
5422
5423If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5424define this macro.
5425
feca2ed3
JW
5426@findex IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR
5427@item IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C})
5428Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5429used as a logical line separator by the assembler.
5430
5431If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5432the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5433
5434
5435@findex ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5436@findex ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5437@item ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5438@itemx ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5439These macros are defined as C string constant, describing the syntax
5440in the assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions. The following
5441definitions are correct for most assemblers:
5442
5443@example
5444#define ASM_OPEN_PAREN "("
5445#define ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ")"
5446@end example
5447@end table
5448
5449 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5450of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5451
5452@table @code
5453@item REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5454@itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5455@itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5456@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE
5457@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE
5458@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE
5459These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the target's
5460floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in the array of
5461@code{long int} whose address is @var{l}. The number of elements in the
5462output array is determined by the size of the desired target floating
5463point data type: 32 bits of it go in each @code{long int} array
5464element. Each array element holds 32 bits of the result, even if
5465@code{long int} is wider than 32 bits on the host machine.
5466
5467The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5468using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5469machine's memory.
5470
5471@item REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL (@var{x}, @var{format}, @var{string})
5472@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL
5473This macro converts @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to a
5474decimal number and stores it as a string into @var{string}.
5475You must pass, as @var{string}, the address of a long enough block
5476of space to hold the result.
5477
5478The argument @var{format} is a @code{printf}-specification that serves
5479as a suggestion for how to format the output string.
5480@end table
5481
5482@node Uninitialized Data
5483@subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5484
5485Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5486outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5487
5488@table @code
5489@findex ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON
5490@item ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5491A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5492@var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5493@var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5494is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5495
5496Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5497output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5498assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5499
5500This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5501common global variables are output.
5502
5503@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON
5504@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5505Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5506separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5507place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5508handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5509as the number of bits.
5510
e9a25f70
JL
5511@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON
5512@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5513Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5514variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
8760eaae 5515is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
e9a25f70
JL
5516in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5517@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5518the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5519
feca2ed3
JW
5520@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON
5521@item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5522If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, except that it
5523is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5524will be used.
5525
5526@findex ASM_OUTPUT_BSS
5527@item ASM_OUTPUT_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5528A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5529@var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5530@var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5531is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5532
5533Try to use function @code{asm_output_bss} defined in @file{varasm.c} when
5534defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5535@code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5536before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5537the name, and a newline.
5538
5539This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized global
5540variables are output. This macro exists to properly support languages like
5541@code{c++} which do not have @code{common} data. However, this macro currently
5542is not defined for all targets. If this macro and
5543@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are not defined then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
e9a25f70
JL
5544or @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} or
5545@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON} is used.
feca2ed3
JW
5546
5547@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS
5548@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5549Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} except takes the required alignment as a
5550separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5551place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, and gives you more flexibility in
5552handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5553as the number of bits.
5554
5555Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5556@file{varasm.c} when defining this macro.
5557
5558@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS
5559@item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5560If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, except that it
5561is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}
5562will be used.
5563
5564@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL
5565@item ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5566A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5567@var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5568@var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5569is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5570
5571Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5572output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5573assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5574
5575This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5576static variables are output.
5577
5578@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL
5579@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5580Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5581separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5582place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5583handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5584as the number of bits.
5585
e9a25f70
JL
5586@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL
5587@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5588Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5589variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
8760eaae 5590is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
e9a25f70
JL
5591in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5592@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5593the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5594
feca2ed3
JW
5595@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL
5596@item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5597If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, except that it
5598is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}
5599will be used.
5600@end table
5601
5602@node Label Output
5603@subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5604
5605@c prevent bad page break with this line
5606This is about outputting labels.
5607
5608@table @code
5609@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL
5610@findex assemble_name
5611@item ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5612A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5613@var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5614Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5615output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5616assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5617
5618@findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME
5619@item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5620A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5621@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5622function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5623outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5624@code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5625@code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5626
5627If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5628usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5629
5630@findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE
5631@item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5632A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5633@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5634which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5635function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5636representing the function.
5637
5638If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5639
5640@findex ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME
5641@item ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5642A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5643@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5644initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5645label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5646@var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5647
5648If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5649usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5650
1cb36a98
RH
5651@findex ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL
5652@item ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5653A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5654@var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5655for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5656
5657If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5658nothing.
5659
feca2ed3
JW
5660@findex ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT
5661@item ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5662A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5663once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5664chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5665initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5666something about the size of the object.
5667
5668If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5669nothing.
5670
5671@findex ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5672@item ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5673A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5674@var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
5675that is, available for reference from other files. Use the expression
5676@code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5677itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5678for making that name global, and a newline.
5679
5680@findex ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5681@item ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5682A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5683@var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5684that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5685no other definition is available. Use the expression
5686@code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5687itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5688for making that name weak, and a newline.
5689
a3a15b4d 5690If you don't define this macro, GCC will not support weak
feca2ed3
JW
5691symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} macro.
5692
5693@findex SUPPORTS_WEAK
5694@item SUPPORTS_WEAK
5695A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5696
5697If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5698definition. If @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} is defined, the default
5699definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5700you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler flag such as
5701@samp{-melf}.
5702
5703@findex MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5704@item MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY
5705A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5706public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5707be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5708format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5709section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5710requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5711
e9a25f70
JL
5712@findex SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5713@item SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
feca2ed3
JW
5714A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5715semantics.
5716
5717If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5718definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5719definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
e9a25f70 5720you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
feca2ed3
JW
5721setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5722be emitted as one-only.
5723
5724@findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL
5725@item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5726A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5727@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5728symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5729not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5730declaration.
5731
5732This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5733The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5734
5735@findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5736@item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (@var{stream}, @var{symref})
5737A C statement (sans semicolon) to output on @var{stream} an assembler
5738pseudo-op to declare a library function name external. The name of the
5739library function is given by @var{symref}, which has type @code{rtx} and
5740is a @code{symbol_ref}.
5741
5742This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5743The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5744
5745@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF
5746@item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5747A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5748@var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5749@var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5750is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5751systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5752
5753@ignore @c Seems not to exist anymore.
5754@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT
5755@item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT (@var{file}, @var{label})
5756Define this macro for systems that use the program @code{collect2}.
5757The definition should be a C statement to output a word containing
5758a reference to the label @var{label}.
5759@end ignore
5760
5761@findex ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL
5762@item ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5763A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
5764name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5765
5766It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
5767used for user-level functions and variables. Otherwise, certain programs
5768will have name conflicts with internal labels.
5769
5770It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
5771object file. Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
5772should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
5773beginning of a label has this effect. You should find out what
5774convention your system uses, and follow it.
5775
5776The usual definition of this macro is as follows:
5777
5778@example
5779fprintf (@var{stream}, "L%s%d:\n", @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5780@end example
5781
8cd0faaf
CM
5782@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALTERNATE_LABEL_NAME
5783@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALTERNATE_LABEL_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5784A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} the string
5785@var{string}.
5786
5787The default definition of this macro is as follows:
5788
5789@example
5790fprintf (@var{stream}, "%s:\n", LABEL_ALTERNATE_NAME (INSN))
5791@end example
5792
feca2ed3
JW
5793@findex ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL
5794@item ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5795A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5796is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5797
5798This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5799produce the output that @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL} would produce
5800with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5801
5802If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5803output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5804@code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5805string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5806to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5807@code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5808you should know what it does on your machine.)
5809
5810@findex ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME
5811@item ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5812A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5813@code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5814@var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5815added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5816
5817The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5818produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5819@var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5820assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5821macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5822internal static variables in different scopes.
5823
5824Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5825conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5826or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5827between the name and the number will suffice.
5828
5829@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF
5830@item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5831A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5832which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5833
203cb4ef 5834@findex SET_ASM_OP
feca2ed3
JW
5835If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5836correct for most systems.
810e3c45 5837
e4faf1eb 5838@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS
8760eaae 5839@item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
e4faf1eb
NC
5840A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5841which defines (equates) the symbol whoes tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5842to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5843be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5844the tree nodes are available.
5845
956d6950
JL
5846@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL
5847@item ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL (@var{stream}, @var{symbol}, @var{high}, @var{low})
5848A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5849which defines (equates) the symbol @var{symbol} to have a value equal to
5850the difference of the two symbols @var{high} and @var{low}, i.e.
a3a15b4d 5851@var{high} minus @var{low}. GCC guarantees that the symbols @var{high}
956d6950
JL
5852and @var{low} are already known by the assembler so that the difference
5853resolves into a constant.
5854
203cb4ef 5855@findex SET_ASM_OP
956d6950
JL
5856If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5857correct for most systems.
5858
810e3c45
JM
5859@findex ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS
5860@item ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5861A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5862which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5863@var{value}.
5864
5865Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5866ASM_OUTPUT_DEF instead if possible.
5867
feca2ed3
JW
5868@findex OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL
5869@item OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5870Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5871Objective C methods.
5872
5873The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5874class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5875the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5876@samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5877
5878These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5879the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5880systems define other ways of computing names.
5881
5882@var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5883buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5884@var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
588550 characters extra.
5886
5887The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5888method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5889@var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or NULL if the method is not
5890in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5891
5892On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5893macro to provide more human-readable names.
5894@end table
5895
5896@node Initialization
5897@subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5898@cindex initialization routines
5899@cindex termination routines
5900@cindex constructors, output of
5901@cindex destructors, output of
5902
5903The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5904(also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5905data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5906to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5907@code{main} is called.
5908
5909Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5910@dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5911terminates.
5912
5913To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5914must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5915be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5916system, you need to specify how to do this.
5917
5918There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5919initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5920Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5921
5922@findex __CTOR_LIST__
5923@findex __DTOR_LIST__
5924The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5925initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5926termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5927
5928Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
59290, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5930the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5931pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5932pointer containing zero.
5933
5934Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5935@file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5936time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5937list; destructors in forward order.
5938
5939The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5940formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5941aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5942Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5943object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5944the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5945accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5946Termination functions are handled similarly.
5947
5948To use this method, you need appropriate definitions of the macros
5949@code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}. Usually
5950you can get them by including @file{svr4.h}.
5951
5952When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5953upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5954support an @dfn{init} section which is executed at program startup,
5955parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5956program is linked by the @code{gcc} driver like this:
5957
5958@example
5959ld -o @var{output_file} crtbegin.o @dots{} crtend.o -lgcc
5960@end example
5961
5962The head of a function (@code{__do_global_ctors}) appears in the init
5963section of @file{crtbegin.o}; the remainder of the function appears in
5964the init section of @file{crtend.o}. The linker will pull these two
5965parts of the section together, making a whole function. If any of the
5966user's object files linked into the middle of it contribute code, then that
5967code will be executed as part of the body of @code{__do_global_ctors}.
5968
5969To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5970macro properly.
5971
5972If no init section is available, do not define
5973@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. Then @code{__do_global_ctors} is built into
5974the text section like all other functions, and resides in
5975@file{libgcc.a}. When GCC compiles any function called @code{main}, it
5976inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5977after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function, also defined
5978in @file{libgcc2.c}, simply calls @file{__do_global_ctors}.
5979
5980In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5981two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5982and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5983@code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5984entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5985and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5986code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5987the value to a ``set''; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5988placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5989a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5990@code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5991section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5992the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5993the initialization process.
5994
5995The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5996This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5997file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'. In
5998this case, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} does not produce an
5999@code{N_SETT} symbol; initialization and termination functions are
6000recognized simply by their names. This requires an extra program in the
6001linkage step, called @code{collect2}. This program pretends to be the
a3a15b4d 6002linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running the ordinary
feca2ed3
JW
6003linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of initialization and
6004termination functions. These functions are called via @code{__main} as
6005described above.
6006
6007Choosing among these configuration options has been simplified by a set
6008of operating-system-dependent files in the @file{config} subdirectory.
6009These files define all of the relevant parameters. Usually it is
6010sufficient to include one into your specific machine-dependent
6011configuration file. These files are:
6012
6013@table @file
6014@item aoutos.h
6015For operating systems using the `a.out' format.
6016
6017@item next.h
6018For operating systems using the `MachO' format.
6019
6020@item svr3.h
6021For System V Release 3 and similar systems using `COFF' format.
6022
6023@item svr4.h
6024For System V Release 4 and similar systems using `ELF' format.
6025
6026@item vms.h
6027For the VMS operating system.
6028@end table
6029
6030@ifinfo
6031The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6032customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6033@end ifinfo
6034
6035@node Macros for Initialization
6036@subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6037
6038Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6039and termination functions:
6040
6041@table @code
6042@findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6043@item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6044If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to identify
a3a15b4d 6045the following data as initialization code. If not defined, GCC will
feca2ed3
JW
6046assume such a section does not exist. When you are using special
6047sections for initialization and termination functions, this macro also
6048controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to run the
6049initialization functions.
6050
6051@item HAS_INIT_SECTION
6052@findex HAS_INIT_SECTION
6053If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6054This macro should be defined for systems that control the contents of the
6055init section on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6056be defined explicitly for systems that support
6057@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6058
6059@item LD_INIT_SWITCH
6060@findex LD_INIT_SWITCH
6061If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6062the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6063
6064@item LD_FINI_SWITCH
6065@findex LD_FINI_SWITCH
6066If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6067the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6068
6069@item INVOKE__main
6070@findex INVOKE__main
6071If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6072@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6073where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6074useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6075
6076@item ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6077@findex ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR
6078Define this macro as a C statement to output on the stream @var{stream}
6079the assembler code to arrange to call the function named @var{name} at
6080initialization time.
6081
6082Assume that @var{name} is the name of a C function generated
6083automatically by the compiler. This function takes no arguments. Use
6084the function @code{assemble_name} to output the name @var{name}; this
6085performs any system-specific syntactic transformations such as adding an
6086underscore.
6087
6088If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output to arrange to
6089call the function. This is correct when the function will be called in
6090some other manner---for example, by means of the @code{collect2} program,
6091which looks through the symbol table to find these functions by their
6092names.
6093
6094@item ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6095@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR
6096This is like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
6097functions rather than initialization functions.
14686fcd
JL
6098
6099When @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} are
6100defined, the initializaiton routine generated for the generated object
6101file will have static linkage.
feca2ed3
JW
6102@end table
6103
6104If your system uses @code{collect2} as the means of processing
6105constructors, then that program normally uses @code{nm} to scan an
14686fcd
JL
6106object file for constructor functions to be called. On such systems you
6107must not define @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}
6108as the object file's initialization routine must have global scope.
6109
6110On certain kinds of systems, you can define these macros to make
6111@code{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
feca2ed3
JW
6112
6113@table @code
6114@findex OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6115@item OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6116Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6117object files, so that @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6118object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6119
6120@findex OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6121@item OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6122Define this macro if the system uses ROSE format object files, so that
6123@code{collect2} can assume this format and scan object files directly
6124for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6125
6126These macros are effective only in a native compiler; @code{collect2} as
6127part of a cross compiler always uses @code{nm} for the target machine.
6128
6129@findex REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6130@item REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6131Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6132to execute @code{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6133@code{nm}.
6134
6135If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6136dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6137these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6138termination functions in shared libraries:
6139
6140@findex LDD_SUFFIX
6141@item LDD_SUFFIX
6142Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the
6143program which lists dynamic dependencies, like @code{"ldd"} under SunOS 4.
6144
6145@findex PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT
6146@item PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{PTR})
6147Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6148of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{PTR} is a variable
6149of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6150from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6151code must advance @var{PTR} to the beginning of the filename on that
6152line. Otherwise, it must set @var{PTR} to @code{NULL}.
6153
6154@end table
6155
6156@node Instruction Output
6157@subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6158
6159@c prevent bad page break with this line
6160This describes assembler instruction output.
6161
6162@table @code
6163@findex REGISTER_NAMES
6164@item REGISTER_NAMES
6165A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6166registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6167register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6168
6169@findex ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6170@item ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6171If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6172and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6173registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6174to registers using alternate names.
6175
6176@findex ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE
6177@item ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6178Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6179requires different names for the machine instructions.
6180
6181The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6182assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6183macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6184points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6185written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6186opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6187increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6188so that it will not be output twice.
6189
6190In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6191name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6192that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6193care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6194@var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6195
6196@findex recog_operand
6197If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6198elements of @code{recog_operand}.
6199
6200If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6201in the usual way.
6202
6203@findex FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN
6204@item FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6205If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6206assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6207they will be output differently.
6208
6209Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6210extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6211elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6212The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6213template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6214by changing the contents of the vector.
6215
6216This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6217file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6218can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6219as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6220syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6221writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6222
6223If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6224
6225@findex FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6226@item FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6227If defined, @code{FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN} will be called on each
6228@code{CODE_LABEL}. In that case, @var{opvec} will be a null pointer and
6229@var{noperands} will be zero.
6230
6231@findex PRINT_OPERAND
6232@item PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6233A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6234assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6235RTL expression.
6236
6237@var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6238of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6239printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6240the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6241operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6242@var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6243@var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6244
6245@findex reg_names
6246If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6247The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6248@code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6249@code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6250
6251When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6252(a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6253with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6254@var{code}.
6255
6256@findex PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P
6257@item PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6258A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6259punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6260@code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6261punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6262in this way.
6263
6264@findex PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS
6265@item PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6266A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6267assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6268whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6269
6270@cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6271On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6272section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the macro
6273@code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6274@code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler Format}.
6275
6276@findex DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND
6277@findex dbr_sequence_length
6278@item DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND(@var{file})
6279A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6280been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6281determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6282currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6283or whatever.
6284
6285Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6286reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6287explicit (e.g. with white space).
6288
6289@findex final_sequence
6290Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6291prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence (i.e.
6292when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6293found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6294processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6295being output.
6296
6297@findex REGISTER_PREFIX
6298@findex LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6299@findex USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6300@findex IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6301@findex asm_fprintf
6302@item REGISTER_PREFIX
6303@itemx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6304@itemx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6305@itemx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6306If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6307@samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6308@file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6309support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6310files can define these macros differently.
6311
fe0503ea
NC
6312@item ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS(@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6313@findex ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS
6314If defiend this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6315statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6316the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6317printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6318statements. Noet that upper case letters are reserved for future
6319generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6320specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6321The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6322string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6323upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6324
feca2ed3
JW
6325@findex ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6326@item ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6327If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6328different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6329numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6330first variant.
6331
6332If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6333@samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}} in the output
6334templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the first argument
6335of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs @samp{option0},
6336@samp{option1} or @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6337@code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one or two, etc. Any special
6338characters within these strings retain their usual meaning.
6339
6340If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6341@samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6342operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6343
6344Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6345@code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
e5e809f4 6346the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
feca2ed3
JW
6347@code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6348if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6349opcodes or operand order.
6350
6351@findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH
6352@item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6353A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6354which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6355The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6356profiling.
6357
6358@findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP
6359@item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6360A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6361which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6362The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6363profiling.
6364@end table
6365
6366@node Dispatch Tables
6367@subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6368
6369@c prevent bad page break with this line
6370This concerns dispatch tables.
6371
6372@table @code
6373@cindex dispatch table
6374@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
33f7f353 6375@item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
feca2ed3
JW
6376A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6377pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6378@var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6379definitions of these labels are output using
6380@code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}, and they must be printed in the same
6381way here. For example,
6382
6383@example
6384fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6385 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6386@end example
6387
6388You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6389dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GNU
6390CC will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC.
33f7f353
JR
6391@var{body} is the body of the ADDR_DIFF_VEC; it is provided so that the
6392mode and flags can be read.
feca2ed3
JW
6393
6394@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
6395@item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6396This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6397in a dispatch table are absolute.
6398
6399The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6400@var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6401a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6402definition is output using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6403For example,
6404
6405@example
6406fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6407@end example
6408
6409@findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
6410@item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6411Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6412specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6413@code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}; the fourth argument is the
6414jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
6415@code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6416
6417This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6418for the table.
6419
6420If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6421@code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6422
6423@findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END
6424@item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6425Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6426jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6427after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6428the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6429@var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6430of the preceding label.
6431
6432If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6433the jump-table.
6434@end table
6435
6436@node Exception Region Output
6437@subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6438
6439@c prevent bad page break with this line
6440
6441This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6442region.
6443
6444@table @code
6445@findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG
6446@item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG ()
6447A C expression to output text to mark the start of an exception region.
6448
6449This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6450
6451@findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END
6452@item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END ()
6453A C expression to output text to mark the end of an exception region.
6454
6455This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6456
0021b564
JM
6457@findex EXCEPTION_SECTION
6458@item EXCEPTION_SECTION ()
6459A C expression to switch to the section in which the main
6460exception table is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is a
6461section named @code{.gcc_except_table} on machines that support named
6462sections via @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME}, otherwise if @samp{-fpic}
6463or @samp{-fPIC} is in effect, the @code{data_section}, otherwise the
6464@code{readonly_data_section}.
6465
6466@findex EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6467@item EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6468If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to switch to
6469the section for exception handling frame unwind information. If not
a3a15b4d 6470defined, GCC will provide a default definition if the target supports
0021b564
JM
6471named sections. @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the
6472appropriate section.
6473
6474You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6475unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6476
feca2ed3
JW
6477@findex OMIT_EH_TABLE
6478@item OMIT_EH_TABLE ()
6479A C expression that is nonzero if the normal exception table output
6480should be omitted.
6481
6482This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6483
6484@findex EH_TABLE_LOOKUP
6485@item EH_TABLE_LOOKUP ()
6486Alternate runtime support for looking up an exception at runtime and
6487finding the associated handler, if the default method won't work.
6488
6489This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6490
6491@findex DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6492@item DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6493A C expression that decides whether or not the current function needs to
6494have a function unwinder generated for it. See the file @code{except.c}
6495for details on when to define this, and how.
6496
6497@findex MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6498@item MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6499An rtx used to mask the return address found via RETURN_ADDR_RTX, so
6500that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
0021b564
JM
6501
6502@findex DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6503@item DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6504Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6505information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6506Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6507@samp{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either @samp{UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP}
6508or @samp{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}), GCC will provide a default definition of
65091.
6510
6511If this macro is defined to 1, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be the default
6512exception handling mechanism; otherwise, setjmp/longjmp will be used by
6513default.
6514
6515If this macro is defined to anything, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be used
6516instead of inline unwinders and __unwind_function in the non-setjmp case.
6517
feca2ed3
JW
6518@end table
6519
6520@node Alignment Output
6521@subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6522
6523@c prevent bad page break with this line
6524This describes commands for alignment.
6525
6526@table @code
fc470718
R
6527@findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER
6528@item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6529The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6530a BARRIER.
feca2ed3
JW
6531
6532This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6533to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6534define the macro.
6535
efa3896a
GK
6536Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6537to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6538@code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6539selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER}
6540implementation.
6541
6542@findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6543@item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6544The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying
6545@code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER}. This works only if
6546@code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6547
fc470718
R
6548@findex LOOP_ALIGN
6549@item LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6550The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6551a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG note.
feca2ed3
JW
6552
6553This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6554to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6555define the macro.
6556
efa3896a
GK
6557Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6558to set the variable @var{align_loops} in the target's
6559@code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6560selection in @var{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6561
6562@findex LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6563@item LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6564The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LOOP_ALIGN}.
6565This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6566
fc470718
R
6567@findex LABEL_ALIGN
6568@item LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6569The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6570If LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER / LOOP_ALIGN specify a different alignment,
6571the maximum of the specified values is used.
6572
efa3896a
GK
6573Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6574to set the variable @var{align_labels} in the target's
6575@code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6576selection in @var{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6577
6578@findex LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6579@item LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6580The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LABEL_ALIGN}.
6581This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6582
feca2ed3
JW
6583@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP
6584@item ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6585A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6586instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6587Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6588expression of type @code{int}.
6589
6590@findex ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6591@item ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6592Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
556e0f21 6593text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
feca2ed3
JW
6594This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6595produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6596section.
6597
6598@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN
6599@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6600A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6601command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6602@var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
26f63a77
JL
6603
6604@findex ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN
6605@item ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6606A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6607command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6608@var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6609satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6610a C expression of type @code{int}.
feca2ed3
JW
6611@end table
6612
6613@need 3000
6614@node Debugging Info
6615@section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6616
6617@c prevent bad page break with this line
6618This describes how to specify debugging information.
6619
6620@menu
6621* All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6622* DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6623* DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6624* File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6625* SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6626@end menu
6627
6628@node All Debuggers
6629@subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6630
6631@c prevent bad page break with this line
6632These macros affect all debugging formats.
6633
6634@table @code
6635@findex DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER
6636@item DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6637A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6638register number @var{regno}. In simple cases, the value of this
6639expression may be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are some
6640registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6641versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in
6642the compiler and another for DBX.
6643
a3a15b4d 6644If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
feca2ed3
JW
6645used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6646consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6647Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6648expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6649
6650If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6651does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6652redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6653
6654@findex DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET
6655@item DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6656A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6657variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6658computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6659gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6660that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6661for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6662@samp{-g} options is used.
6663
6664@findex DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET
6665@item DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6666A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6667having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6668@var{offset}.
6669
6670@findex PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6671@item PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
a3a15b4d 6672A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
e5e809f4 6673produce when the user specifies just @samp{-g}. Define
a3a15b4d 6674this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
e5e809f4 6675debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
f3ff3f4a
JM
6676@code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, and
6677@code{XCOFF_DEBUG}.
feca2ed3 6678
a3a15b4d 6679When the user specifies @samp{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
e5e809f4
JL
6680value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6681exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined and
a3a15b4d 6682@code{LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2} is not defined, GCC uses the
e5e809f4 6683value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
a3a15b4d 6684defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
deabc777 6685
feca2ed3
JW
6686The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6687user can always get a specific type of output by using @samp{-gstabs},
f3ff3f4a 6688@samp{-gcoff}, @samp{-gdwarf-1}, @samp{-gdwarf-2}, or @samp{-gxcoff}.
feca2ed3
JW
6689@end table
6690
6691@node DBX Options
6692@subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6693
6694@c prevent bad page break with this line
6695These are specific options for DBX output.
6696
6697@table @code
6698@findex DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6699@item DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
a3a15b4d 6700Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
feca2ed3
JW
6701in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6702
6703@findex XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6704@item XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
a3a15b4d 6705Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
feca2ed3
JW
6706in response to the @samp{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6707
6708@findex DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6709@item DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
a3a15b4d 6710Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
feca2ed3
JW
6711GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6712debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6713macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6714if there is any occasion to.
6715
6716@findex DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6717@item DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6718Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6719in the text section.
6720
6721@findex ASM_STABS_OP
6722@item ASM_STABS_OP
6723A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6724@code{.stabs} to define an ordinary debugging symbol. If you don't
6725define this macro, @code{.stabs} is used. This macro applies only to
6726DBX debugging information format.
6727
6728@findex ASM_STABD_OP
6729@item ASM_STABD_OP
6730A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6731@code{.stabd} to define a debugging symbol whose value is the current
6732location. If you don't define this macro, @code{.stabd} is used.
6733This macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6734
6735@findex ASM_STABN_OP
6736@item ASM_STABN_OP
6737A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6738@code{.stabn} to define a debugging symbol with no name. If you don't
6739define this macro, @code{.stabn} is used. This macro applies only to
6740DBX debugging information format.
6741
6742@findex DBX_NO_XREFS
6743@item DBX_NO_XREFS
6744Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6745@samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6746describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6747On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6748
6749@findex DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6750@item DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6751A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6752continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6753exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6754operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6755must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6756with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6757defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6758
6759@findex DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6760@item DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6761Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6762the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6763a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6764constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6765if backslash is correct for your system.
6766
6767@findex DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6768@item DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6769Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6770outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6771variable.
6772
6773@findex DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6774@item DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6775The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6776for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6777
6778@findex DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6779@item DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6780The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6781for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6782provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6783
6784@findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6785@item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6786The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6787for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6788``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6789
6790@findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6791@item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6792The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6793passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6794do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6795
6796@findex DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6797@item DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6798The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a stack
6799parameter. The default is @code{'p'}.
6800
6801@findex DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6802@item DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6803Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6804arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6805in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6806code.
6807
6808@findex DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6809@item DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6810Define this macro if the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol for a block should
6811precede the debugging information for variables and functions defined in
6812that block. Normally, in DBX format, the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol comes
6813first.
6814
6815@findex DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6816@item DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6817Define this macro if the value of a symbol describing the scope of a
6818block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be relative to the start
6819of the enclosing function. Normally, GNU C uses an absolute address.
6820
6821@findex DBX_USE_BINCL
6822@item DBX_USE_BINCL
6823Define this macro if GNU C should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6824@code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6825macro also directs GNU C to output a type number as a pair of a file
6826number and a type number within the file. Normally, GNU C does not
6827generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6828number for a type number.
6829@end table
6830
6831@node DBX Hooks
6832@subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6833
6834@c prevent bad page break with this line
6835These are hooks for DBX format.
6836
6837@table @code
6838@findex DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC
6839@item DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6840Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
6841information for the start of a scope level for variable names. The
6842argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
6843@code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
6844
6845@findex DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC
6846@item DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6847Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
6848
6849@findex DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM
6850@item DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM (@var{stream}, @var{type})
6851Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
6852output an enumeration type. The definition should be a C statement
6853(sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information to @var{stream}
6854for the type @var{type}.
6855
6856@findex DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END
6857@item DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END (@var{stream}, @var{function})
6858Define this macro if the target machine requires special output at the
6859end of the debugging information for a function. The definition should
6860be a C statement (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information
6861to @var{stream}. @var{function} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node for
6862the function.
6863
6864@findex DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES
6865@item DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES (@var{syms})
6866Define this macro if you need to control the order of output of the
6867standard data types at the beginning of compilation. The argument
6868@var{syms} is a @code{tree} which is a chain of all the predefined
6869global symbols, including names of data types.
6870
6871Normally, DBX output starts with definitions of the types for integers
6872and characters, followed by all the other predefined types of the
6873particular language in no particular order.
6874
6875On some machines, it is necessary to output different particular types
6876first. To do this, define @code{DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES} to output
6877those symbols in the necessary order. Any predefined types that you
6878don't explicitly output will be output afterward in no particular order.
6879
6880Be careful not to define this macro so that it works only for C. There
6881are no global variables to access most of the built-in types, because
6882another language may have another set of types. The way to output a
6883particular type is to look through @var{syms} to see if you can find it.
6884Here is an example:
6885
6886@smallexample
6887@{
6888 tree decl;
6889 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6890 if (!strcmp (IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (decl)),
6891 "long int"))
6892 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6893 @dots{}
6894@}
6895@end smallexample
6896
6897@noindent
6898This does nothing if the expected type does not exist.
6899
6900See the function @code{init_decl_processing} in @file{c-decl.c} to find
6901the names to use for all the built-in C types.
6902
6903Here is another way of finding a particular type:
6904
6905@c this is still overfull. --mew 10feb93
6906@smallexample
6907@{
6908 tree decl;
6909 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6910 if (TREE_CODE (decl) == TYPE_DECL
6911 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (decl))
6912 == INTEGER_CST)
6913 && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (decl)) == 16
6914 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
6915@group
6916 /* @r{This must be @code{unsigned short}.} */
6917 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6918 @dots{}
6919@}
6920@end group
6921@end smallexample
6922
6923@findex NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6924@item NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6925Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6926@code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extention construct.
6927On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6928disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6929
6930@end table
6931
6932@node File Names and DBX
6933@subsection File Names in DBX Format
6934
6935@c prevent bad page break with this line
6936This describes file names in DBX format.
6937
6938@table @code
6939@findex DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6940@item DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6941Define this if DBX wants to have the current directory recorded in each
6942object file.
6943
6944Note that the working directory is always recorded if GDB extensions are
6945enabled.
6946
6947@findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME
6948@item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6949A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6950@var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6951file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6952This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6953
6954This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6955for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6956
6957@findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6958@item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6959A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6960@var{stream} which indicates that the current directory during
6961compilation is named @var{name}.
6962
6963This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6964for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6965
6966@findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6967@item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6968A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6969compilation of the main source file @var{name}.
6970
6971If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6972of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6973
6974@findex DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
6975@item DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6976A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6977@var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the current source
6978file. This output is generated each time input shifts to a different
6979source file as a result of @samp{#include}, the end of an included file,
6980or a @samp{#line} command.
6981
6982This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6983for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6984@end table
6985
6986@need 2000
6987@node SDB and DWARF
6988@subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
6989
6990@c prevent bad page break with this line
6991Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
6992
6993@table @code
6994@findex SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6995@item SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
a3a15b4d 6996Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
feca2ed3
JW
6997for SDB in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6998
6999@findex DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
7000@item DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
a3a15b4d 7001Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf format debugging output
feca2ed3
JW
7002in response to the @samp{-g} option.
7003
f3ff3f4a
JM
7004@findex DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
7005@item DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
a3a15b4d 7006Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
f3ff3f4a
JM
7007debugging output in response to the @samp{-g} option.
7008
861bb6c1
JL
7009To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
7010define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
7011@code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
7012prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
7013as appropriate from @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
7014
9ec36da5
JL
7015@findex DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
7016@item DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
a3a15b4d 7017Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
9ec36da5 7018Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}
a3a15b4d 7019(@pxref{Exception Region Output} is nonzero, GCC will output this
9ec36da5
JL
7020information not matter how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
7021
deabc777
PE
7022@findex LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
7023@item LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
e5e809f4 7024Define this macro if the linker does not work with Dwarf version 2.
a3a15b4d 7025Normally, if the user specifies only @samp{-ggdb} GCC will use Dwarf
e5e809f4
JL
7026version 2 if available; this macro disables this. See the description
7027of the @code{PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE} macro for more details.
deabc777 7028
b366352b
MM
7029@findex DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
7030@item DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
7031By default, the Dwarf 2 debugging information generator will generate a
7032label to mark the beginning of the text section. If it is better simply
7033to use the name of the text section itself, rather than an explicit label,
7034to indicate the beginning of the text section, define this macro to zero.
7035
b2244e22
JW
7036@findex DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7037@item DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7038Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
7039line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
7040tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
7041
feca2ed3
JW
7042@findex PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7043@item PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7044Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7045SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7046macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7047not define them yourself.
7048
7049@findex SDB_DELIM
7050@item SDB_DELIM
7051Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7052SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7053delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7054a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7055required.
7056
7057@findex SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
7058@item SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
7059Define this macro to override the usual method of constructing a dummy
7060name for anonymous structure and union types. See @file{sdbout.c} for
7061more information.
7062
7063@findex SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7064@item SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7065Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7066union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7067allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7068it.
7069
7070@findex SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7071@item SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7072Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7073enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7074assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7075@end table
7076
7077@node Cross-compilation
7078@section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7079@cindex cross compilation and floating point
7080@cindex floating point and cross compilation
7081
7082While all modern machines use 2's complement representation for integers,
7083there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7084means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7085in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7086doing the compilation.
7087
7088@findex atof
7089Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7090range and precision, the cross compiler cannot safely use the host
7091machine's floating point arithmetic. Therefore, floating point constants
7092must be represented in the target machine's format. This means that the
7093cross compiler cannot use @code{atof} to parse a floating point constant;
7094it must have its own special routine to use instead. Also, constant
7095folding must emulate the target machine's arithmetic (or must not be done
7096at all).
7097
7098The macros in the following table should be defined only if you are cross
7099compiling between different floating point formats.
7100
7101Otherwise, don't define them. Then default definitions will be set up which
7102use @code{double} as the data type, @code{==} to test for equality, etc.
7103
7104You don't need to worry about how many times you use an operand of any
7105of these macros. The compiler never uses operands which have side effects.
7106
7107@table @code
7108@findex REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7109@item REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7110A macro for the C data type to be used to hold a floating point value
7111in the target machine's format. Typically this would be a
7112@code{struct} containing an array of @code{int}.
7113
7114@findex REAL_VALUES_EQUAL
7115@item REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (@var{x}, @var{y})
7116A macro for a C expression which compares for equality the two values,
7117@var{x} and @var{y}, both of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7118
7119@findex REAL_VALUES_LESS
7120@item REAL_VALUES_LESS (@var{x}, @var{y})
7121A macro for a C expression which tests whether @var{x} is less than
7122@var{y}, both values being of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and
7123interpreted as floating point numbers in the target machine's
7124representation.
7125
7126@findex REAL_VALUE_LDEXP
7127@findex ldexp
7128@item REAL_VALUE_LDEXP (@var{x}, @var{scale})
7129A macro for a C expression which performs the standard library
7130function @code{ldexp}, but using the target machine's floating point
7131representation. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression have
7132type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. The second argument, @var{scale}, is an
7133integer.
7134
7135@findex REAL_VALUE_FIX
7136@item REAL_VALUE_FIX (@var{x})
7137A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7138floating point value @var{x} to a signed integer. @var{x} has type
7139@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7140
7141@findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX
7142@item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (@var{x})
7143A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7144floating point value @var{x} to an unsigned integer. @var{x} has type
7145@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7146
7147@findex REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT
7148@item REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7149A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7150floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an integer value (but still
7151as a floating point number). @var{x} has type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE},
7152and so does the value.
7153
7154@findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT
7155@item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7156A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7157floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an unsigned integer value
7158(but still represented as a floating point number). @var{x} has type
7159@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, and so does the value.
7160
7161@findex REAL_VALUE_ATOF
7162@item REAL_VALUE_ATOF (@var{string}, @var{mode})
7163A macro for a C expression which converts @var{string}, an expression of
7164type @code{char *}, into a floating point number in the target machine's
7165representation for mode @var{mode}. The value has type
7166@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7167
7168@findex REAL_INFINITY
7169@item REAL_INFINITY
7170Define this macro if infinity is a possible floating point value, and
7171therefore division by 0 is legitimate.
7172
7173@findex REAL_VALUE_ISINF
7174@findex isinf
7175@item REAL_VALUE_ISINF (@var{x})
7176A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7177point value, is infinity. The value has type @code{int}.
7178By default, this is defined to call @code{isinf}.
7179
7180@findex REAL_VALUE_ISNAN
7181@findex isnan
7182@item REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (@var{x})
7183A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7184point value, is a ``nan'' (not-a-number). The value has type
7185@code{int}. By default, this is defined to call @code{isnan}.
7186@end table
7187
7188@cindex constant folding and floating point
7189Define the following additional macros if you want to make floating
7190point constant folding work while cross compiling. If you don't
7191define them, cross compilation is still possible, but constant folding
7192will not happen for floating point values.
7193
7194@table @code
7195@findex REAL_ARITHMETIC
7196@item REAL_ARITHMETIC (@var{output}, @var{code}, @var{x}, @var{y})
7197A macro for a C statement which calculates an arithmetic operation of
7198the two floating point values @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type
7199@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} in the target machine's representation, to
7200produce a result of the same type and representation which is stored
7201in @var{output} (which will be a variable).
7202
7203The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}, a tree code
7204which will always be one of the following: @code{PLUS_EXPR},
7205@code{MINUS_EXPR}, @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR},
7206@code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.@refill
7207
7208@cindex overflow while constant folding
7209The expansion of this macro is responsible for checking for overflow.
7210If overflow happens, the macro expansion should execute the statement
7211@code{return 0;}, which indicates the inability to perform the
7212arithmetic operation requested.
7213
7214@findex REAL_VALUE_NEGATE
7215@item REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (@var{x})
7216A macro for a C expression which returns the negative of the floating
7217point value @var{x}. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression
7218have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and are in the target machine's
7219floating point representation.
7220
7221There is no way for this macro to report overflow, since overflow
7222can't happen in the negation operation.
7223
7224@findex REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE
7225@item REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (@var{mode}, @var{x})
7226A macro for a C expression which converts the floating point value
7227@var{x} to mode @var{mode}.
7228
7229Both @var{x} and the value of the expression are in the target machine's
7230floating point representation and have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7231However, the value should have an appropriate bit pattern to be output
7232properly as a floating constant whose precision accords with mode
7233@var{mode}.
7234
7235There is no way for this macro to report overflow.
7236
7237@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_INT
7238@item REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (@var{low}, @var{high}, @var{x})
7239A macro for a C expression which converts a floating point value
7240@var{x} into a double-precision integer which is then stored into
7241@var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int}.
7242
7243@item REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (@var{x}, @var{low}, @var{high}, @var{mode})
7244@findex REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT
7245A macro for a C expression which converts a double-precision integer
7246found in @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int},
7247into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.
7248The value is in the target machine's representation for mode @var{mode}
7249and has the type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7250@end table
7251
9f09b1f2
R
7252@node Mode Switching
7253@section Mode Switching Instructions
7254@cindex mode switching
7255The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7256
7257@table @code
7258@findex OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING
7259@item OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7260Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7261switching in an optimizing compilation.
7262
7263For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7264floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7265the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7266operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7267purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7268be inserted before reload, i.e. you can't put this into instruction emitting
7269or MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG.
7270
7271You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7272which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7273return non-zero for any @var{entity} that that needs mode-switching.
7274If you define this macro, you also have to define
7275@code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{MODE_NEEDED},
7276@code{MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE} and @code{EMIT_MODE_SET}.
7277@code{MODE_AT_ENTRY} and @code{MODE_USES_IN_EXIT_BLOCK} are optional.
7278
7279@findex NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7280@item NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7281If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7282initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7283N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7284of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7285The position of the initializer in the initializer - starting counting at
7286zero - determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7287entity in question.
7288In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7289represented as numbers 0 .. N - 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7290switch is needed / supplied.
7291
7292@findex MODE_USES_IN_EXIT_BLOCK
7293@item MODE_USES_IN_EXIT_BLOCK
7294If this macro is defined, it is called for each exit block when mode switching
7295optimization is performed. Its return value should be the pattern of an insn,
7296or a sequence of insns. It is emitted before the return insn / use insns at
7297the end of the exit block.
7298
7299This is done before insns are examined for their need of any mode switching.
7300
7301@findex MODE_NEEDED
7302@item MODE_NEEDED (@var{entity}, @var{insn})
7303@var{entity} is an integer specifying a mode-switched entity. If
7304@code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} is defined, you must define this macro to
7305return an integer value not larger than the corresponding element in
7306NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING, to denote the mode that @var{entity} must
7307be switched into prior to the execution of INSN.
7308
7309@findex MODE_AT_ENTRY
7310@item MODE_AT_ENTRY (@var{entity})
7311If this macro is defined, it is evaluated for every @var{entity} that needs
7312mode switching. It should evaluate to an integer, which is a mode that
7313@var{entity} is assumed to be switched to at function entry.
7314
7315@findex MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE
7316@item MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE (@var{entity}, @var{n})
7317This macro specifies the order in which modes for ENTITY are processed.
73180 is the highest priority, NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING[ENTITY] - 1 the
7319lowest. The value of the macro should be an integer designating a mode
7320for ENTITY. For any fixed @var{entity}, @code{mode_priority_to_mode}
7321(@var{entity}, @var{n}) shall be a bijection in 0 ..
7322@code{num_modes_for_mode_switching}[@var{entity}] - 1 .
7323
7324@findex EMIT_MODE_SET
7325@item EMIT_MODE_SET (@var{entity}, @var{mode}, @var{hard_regs_live})
7326Generate one or more insns to set @var{entity} to @var{mode}.
7327@var{hard_reg_live} is the set of hard registers live at the point where
7328the insn(s) are to be inserted.
7329@end table
7330
feca2ed3
JW
7331@node Misc
7332@section Miscellaneous Parameters
7333@cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7334
7335@c prevent bad page break with this line
7336Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7337
7338@table @code
7339@item PREDICATE_CODES
7340@findex PREDICATE_CODES
7341Define this if you have defined special-purpose predicates in the file
7342@file{@var{machine}.c}. This macro is called within an initializer of an
7343array of structures. The first field in the structure is the name of a
7344predicate and the second field is an array of rtl codes. For each
7345predicate, list all rtl codes that can be in expressions matched by the
7346predicate. The list should have a trailing comma. Here is an example
7347of two entries in the list for a typical RISC machine:
7348
7349@smallexample
7350#define PREDICATE_CODES \
7351 @{"gen_reg_rtx_operand", @{SUBREG, REG@}@}, \
7352 @{"reg_or_short_cint_operand", @{SUBREG, REG, CONST_INT@}@},
7353@end smallexample
7354
7355Defining this macro does not affect the generated code (however,
7356incorrect definitions that omit an rtl code that may be matched by the
7357predicate can cause the compiler to malfunction). Instead, it allows
7358the table built by @file{genrecog} to be more compact and efficient,
7359thus speeding up the compiler. The most important predicates to include
556e0f21 7360in the list specified by this macro are those used in the most insn
feca2ed3
JW
7361patterns.
7362
8fe0ca0c
RH
7363@item SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES
7364@findex SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES
7365Define this if you have special predicates that know special things
7366about modes. Genrecog will warn about certain forms of
7367@code{match_operand} without a mode; if the operand predicate is
7368listed in @code{SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES}, the warning will be
7369suppressed.
7370
7371Here is an example from the IA-32 port (@code{ext_register_operand}
7372specially checks for @code{HImode} or @code{SImode} in preparation
7373for a byte extraction from @code{%ah} etc.).
7374
7375@smallexample
7376#define SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES \
7377 "ext_register_operand",
7378@end smallexample
7379
feca2ed3
JW
7380@findex CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7381@item CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7382An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7383elements of a jump-table should have.
7384
33f7f353
JR
7385@findex CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE
7386@item CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7387Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7388when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7389it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7390To make this work, you also have to define INSN_ALIGN and
7391make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
391aaa6b 7392The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
33f7f353
JR
7393flags can be updated.
7394
feca2ed3
JW
7395@findex CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7396@item CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
18543a22
ILT
7397Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7398should contain relative addresses. If jump-tables never contain
7399relative addresses, then you need not define this macro.
feca2ed3
JW
7400
7401@findex CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7402@item CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7403Define this if control falls through a @code{case} insn when the index
7404value is out of range. This means the specified default-label is
7405actually ignored by the @code{case} insn proper.
7406
7407@findex CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7408@item CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7409Define this to be the smallest number of different values for which it
7410is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
7411The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
7412five otherwise. This is best for most machines.
7413
7414@findex WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7415@item WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7416Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7417smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7418Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7419
7420@findex LOAD_EXTEND_OP
7421@item LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mode})
7422Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7423memory in @var{mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7424bits outside of @var{mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7425zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7426of @var{mode} for which the
7427insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7428@code{NIL} for other modes.
7429
7430This macro is not called with @var{mode} non-integral or with a width
7431greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7432value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7433@code{NIL}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7434define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7435
77643ab8
MM
7436@findex SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7437@item SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7438Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7439extends.
7440
feca2ed3
JW
7441@findex IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7442@item IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7443An alias for a tree code that should be used by default for conversion
7444of floating point values to fixed point. Normally,
7445@code{FIX_ROUND_EXPR} is used.@refill
7446
7447@findex FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7448@item FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7449Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
7450point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
7451unsigned one.
7452
7453@findex EASY_DIV_EXPR
7454@item EASY_DIV_EXPR
7455An alias for a tree code that is the easiest kind of division to
7456compile code for in the general case. It may be
7457@code{TRUNC_DIV_EXPR}, @code{FLOOR_DIV_EXPR}, @code{CEIL_DIV_EXPR} or
7458@code{ROUND_DIV_EXPR}. These four division operators differ in how
7459they round the result to an integer. @code{EASY_DIV_EXPR} is used
7460when it is permissible to use any of those kinds of division and the
7461choice should be made on the basis of efficiency.@refill
7462
7463@findex MOVE_MAX
7464@item MOVE_MAX
7465The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7466between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7467
7468@findex MAX_MOVE_MAX
7469@item MAX_MOVE_MAX
7470The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7471between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7472is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7473constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7474at run-time.
7475
7476@findex SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7477@item SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7478A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7479actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7480of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7481this macro is non-zero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7482a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7483truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7484instructions that act on bitfields at variable positions, which may
7485include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7486also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7487arguments to bitfield instructions.
7488
7489If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7490position (for bitfield operations), or if no variable-position bitfield
7491instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7492
7493However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7494only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7495bitfield operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7496such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7497the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7498
7499You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7500
7501@findex TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7502@item TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7503A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7504``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7505bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7506operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7507
7508On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7509
7510@c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7511@c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7512When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7513modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7514If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7515such cases may improve things.
7516
7517@findex STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7518@item STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7519A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7520with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7521(@samp{s@var{cond}}) when the condition is true. This description must
7522apply to @emph{all} the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns and all the
7523comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7524
7525A value of 1 or -1 means that the instruction implementing the
7526comparison operator returns exactly 1 or -1 when the comparison is true
7527and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7528which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7529true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7530operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7531@samp{s@var{cond}} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7532@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7533the compiler.
7534
7535If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or -1, the compiler will
7536generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7537replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7538the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7539For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7540@code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7541@samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7542expression
7543
7544@smallexample
7545(ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7546@end smallexample
7547
7548@noindent
7549can be converted to
7550
7551@smallexample
7552(ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7553@end smallexample
7554
7555@noindent
7556where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7557tested into the sign bit.
7558
7559There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7560for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7561but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
a3a15b4d 7562are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
feca2ed3
JW
7563perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7564comparison operators and let us know
7565@ifset USING
7566(@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs}).
7567@end ifset
7568@ifclear USING
7569(@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs,gcc.info,Using GCC}).
7570@end ifclear
7571
7572Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7573from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7574choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7575to be used:
7576
7577@itemize @bullet
7578@item
7579Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7580@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7581``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7582comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7583combine the normalization with other operations.
7584
7585@item
7586For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or -1, with -1 being
7587slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7588other machines.
7589
7590@item
7591As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7592exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7593others.
7594
7595@item
7596Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7597@end itemize
7598
7599Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7600@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7601instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7602those cases, e.g., one matching
7603
7604@smallexample
7605(set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7606@end smallexample
7607
7608Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7609condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7610@samp{s@var{cond}} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7611machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7612and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7613@code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7614@file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptizer can be used to
7615find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7616
7617You need not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7618instructions.
7619
7620@findex FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
12530dbe
RH
7621@item FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7622A C expression that gives a non-zero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
feca2ed3
JW
7623returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7624Define this macro on machine that have comparison operations that return
7625floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7626this macro.
7627
7628@findex Pmode
7629@item Pmode
7630An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7631this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7632pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7633On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7634modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7635
7636The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7637@code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7638@code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7639to @code{Pmode}.
7640
7641@findex FUNCTION_MODE
7642@item FUNCTION_MODE
7643An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7644being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most machines this
7645should be @code{QImode}.
7646
7647@findex INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD
7648@item INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD (@var{decl})
7649A C expression for the maximum number of instructions above which the
7650function @var{decl} should not be inlined. @var{decl} is a
7651@code{FUNCTION_DECL} node.
7652
7653The default definition of this macro is 64 plus 8 times the number of
7654arguments that the function accepts. Some people think a larger
7655threshold should be used on RISC machines.
7656
7657@findex SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7658@item SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7659Define this if the preprocessor should ignore @code{#sccs} directives
7660and print no error message.
7661
7662@findex NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7663@item NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7664Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C.
7665This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7666C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7667@samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7668
7669@findex HANDLE_PRAGMA
7670@findex #pragma
7671@findex pragma
e2af664c 7672@item HANDLE_PRAGMA (@var{getc}, @var{ungetc}, @var{name})
feca2ed3 7673Define this macro if you want to implement any pragmas. If defined, it
f09db6e0 7674is a C expression whose value is 1 if the pragma was handled by the
e2af664c 7675macro, zero otherwise. The argument @var{getc} is a function of type
f09db6e0
NC
7676@samp{int (*)(void)} which will return the next character in the input
7677stream, or EOF if no characters are left. The argument @var{ungetc} is
7678a function of type @samp{void (*)(int)} which will push a character back
7679into the input stream. The argument @var{name} is the word following
7680#pragma in the input stream. The input stream pointer will be pointing
7681just beyond the end of this word. The input stream should be left
7682undistrubed if the expression returns zero, otherwise it should be
e2af664c
NC
7683pointing at the next character after the end of the pragma. Any
7684characters remaining on the line will be ignored.
feca2ed3
JW
7685
7686It is generally a bad idea to implement new uses of @code{#pragma}. The
7687only reason to define this macro is for compatibility with other
7688compilers that do support @code{#pragma} for the sake of any user
7689programs which already use it.
7690
f09db6e0
NC
7691If the pragma can be implemented by atttributes then the macro
7692@samp{INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} might be a useful one to define as well.
7693
7694Note: older versions of this macro only had two arguments: @var{stream}
7695and @var{token}. The macro was changed in order to allow it to work
7696when gcc is built both with and without a cpp library.
7697
e2af664c
NC
7698@findex HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7699@findex #pragma
7700@findex pragma
7701@item HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7702Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want the System V style
7703pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(<n>)} and @samp{#pragma weak <name>
7704[=<value>]} to be supported by gcc.
7705
7706The pack pragma specifies the maximum alignment (in bytes) of fields
7707within a structure, in much the same way as the @samp{__aligned__} and
7708@samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A pack value of zero resets
7709the behaviour to the default.
7710
7711The weak pragma only works if @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} and
7712@code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} are defined. If enabled it allows the creation
7713of specifically named weak labels, optionally with a value.
7714
7715@findex HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7716@findex #pragma
7717@findex pragma
7718@item HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7719Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want to support the Win32
7720style pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(push,<n>)} and @samp{#pragma
7721pack(pop)}. The pack(push,<n>) pragma specifies the maximum alignment
7722(in bytes) of fields within a structure, in much the same way as the
7723@samp{__aligned__} and @samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A
7724pack value of zero resets the behaviour to the default. Successive
7725invocations of this pragma cause the previous values to be stacked, so
7726that invocations of @samp{#pragma pack(pop)} will return to the previous
7727value.
7728
feca2ed3
JW
7729@findex VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE
7730@item VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE (@var{decl}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7731If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7732arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{decl}.
7733The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{decl}.
7734
7735@findex VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE
7736@item VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE (@var{type}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7737If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7738arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{type}.
7739The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{type}.
7740
7741@findex COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7742@item COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7743If defined, a C expression whose value is zero if the attributes on
7744@var{type1} and @var{type2} are incompatible, one if they are compatible,
7745and two if they are nearly compatible (which causes a warning to be
7746generated).
7747
7748@findex SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7749@item SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type})
7750If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7751newly defined @var{type}.
7752
d9525bec
BK
7753@findex MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7754@item MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7755Define this macro if the merging of type attributes needs special handling.
7756If defined, the result is a list of the combined TYPE_ATTRIBUTES of
7757@var{type1} and @var{type2}. It is assumed that comptypes has already been
7758called and returned 1.
7759
7760@findex MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7761@item MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{olddecl}, @var{newdecl})
7762Define this macro if the merging of decl attributes needs special handling.
7763If defined, the result is a list of the combined DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of
7764@var{olddecl} and @var{newdecl}. @var{newdecl} is a duplicate declaration
7765of @var{olddecl}. Examples of when this is needed are when one attribute
7766overrides another, or when an attribute is nullified by a subsequent
7767definition.
7768
f09db6e0
NC
7769@findex INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7770@item INSERT_ATTRIBUTES (@var{node}, @var{attr_ptr}, @var{prefix_ptr})
7771Define this macro if you want to be able to add attributes to a decl
7772when it is being created. This is normally useful for backends which
7773wish to implement a pragma by using the attributes which correspond to
7774the pragma's effect. The @var{node} argument is the decl which is being
7775created. The @var{attr_ptr} argument is a pointer to the attribute list
7776for this decl. The @var{prefix_ptr} is a pointer to the list of
7777attributes that have appeared after the specifiers and modifiers of the
7778declaration, but before the declaration proper.
7779
9ec36da5
JL
7780@findex SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7781@item SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{decl}, @var{attributes})
7782If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7783newly defined @var{decl}.
7784
feca2ed3
JW
7785@findex DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7786@item DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7787Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in identifier
37d13a29 7788names. 0 means @samp{$} is not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed.
feca2ed3 77891 is the default; there is no need to define this macro in that case.
37d13a29 7790This macro controls the compiler proper; it does not affect the preprocessor.
feca2ed3
JW
7791
7792@findex NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7793@item NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7794Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7795@samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
7796G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
7797@samp{.} is used instead.
7798
7799@findex NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7800@item NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7801Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7802@samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
7803have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
7804are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
7805
7806@findex DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7807@item DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7808Define this macro if the target system expects every program's @code{main}
7809function to return a standard ``success'' value by default (if no other
7810value is explicitly returned).
7811
7812The definition should be a C statement (sans semicolon) to generate the
7813appropriate rtl instructions. It is used only when compiling the end of
7814@code{main}.
7815
c063dc98
JM
7816@item NEED_ATEXIT
7817@findex NEED_ATEXIT
7818Define this if the target system lacks the function @code{atexit}
7819from the ANSI C standard. If this macro is defined, a default definition
7820will be provided to support C++. If @code{ON_EXIT} is not defined,
7821a default @code{exit} function will also be provided.
7822
7823@item ON_EXIT
7824@findex ON_EXIT
7825Define this macro if the target has another way to implement atexit
7826functionality without replacing @code{exit}. For instance, SunOS 4 has
7827a similar @code{on_exit} library function.
7828
7829The definition should be a functional macro which can be used just like
7830the @code{atexit} function.
feca2ed3
JW
7831
7832@item EXIT_BODY
7833@findex EXIT_BODY
7834Define this if your @code{exit} function needs to do something
7835besides calling an external function @code{_cleanup} before
7836terminating with @code{_exit}. The @code{EXIT_BODY} macro is
e9a25f70 7837only needed if neither @code{HAVE_ATEXIT} nor
feca2ed3
JW
7838@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} are defined.
7839
7840@findex INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED
7841@item INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7842Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7843delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7844even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
a3a15b4d 7845@var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
feca2ed3
JW
7846every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7847or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7848you should define this macro.
7849
7850You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7851
7852@findex INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED
7853@item INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7854Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7855delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7856even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7857@var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7858some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7859are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7860define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7861instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7862slot of @var{insn}.
7863
7864You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7865
7866@findex MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7867@item MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG (@var{insn})
7868In rare cases, correct code generation requires extra machine
7869dependent processing between the second jump optimization pass and
7870delayed branch scheduling. On those machines, define this macro as a C
7871statement to act on the code starting at @var{insn}.
7872
861bb6c1
JL
7873@findex MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7874@item MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7875Define this macro if in some cases global symbols from one translation
7876unit may not be bound to undefined symbols in another translation unit
7877without user intervention. For instance, under Microsoft Windows
7878symbols must be explicitly imported from shared libraries (DLLs).
7879
57bcb97a
RH
7880@findex MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7881@item MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7882A C statement that adds to @var{CLOBBERS} @code{STRING_CST} trees for
7883any hard regs the port wishes to automatically clobber for all asms.
7884
70cfa7ad
MM
7885@findex ISSUE_RATE
7886@item ISSUE_RATE
7887A C expression that returns how many instructions can be issued at the
a89608cb 7888same time if the machine is a superscalar machine.
70cfa7ad 7889
e4da5f6d 7890@findex MD_SCHED_INIT
5ea05bba 7891@item MD_SCHED_INIT (@var{file}, @var{verbose})
a89608cb 7892A C statement which is executed by the scheduler at the
e4da5f6d
MM
7893beginning of each block of instructions that are to be scheduled.
7894@var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any
7895debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
7896@samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7897
7898@findex MD_SCHED_REORDER
8760eaae 7899@item MD_SCHED_REORDER (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{ready}, @var{n_ready}, @var{clock}, @var{can_issue_more})
a89608cb 7900A C statement which is executed by the scheduler after it
e4da5f6d
MM
7901has scheduled the ready list to allow the machine description to reorder
7902it (for example to combine two small instructions together on
7903@samp{VLIW} machines). @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio
7904stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level
7905provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}. @var{ready} is a pointer to
7906the ready list of instructions that are ready to be scheduled.
7907@var{n_ready} is the number of elements in the ready list. The
7908scheduler reads the ready list in reverse order, starting with
197043f5
RH
7909@var{ready}[@var{n_ready}-1] and going to @var{ready}[0]. @var{clock}
7910is the timer tick of the scheduler. @var{can_issue_more} is an output
7911parameter that is set to the number of insns that can issue this clock;
7912normally this is just @code{issue_rate}.
e4da5f6d
MM
7913
7914@findex MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
7915@item MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{insn}, @var{more})
a89608cb 7916A C statement which is executed by the scheduler after it
e4da5f6d
MM
7917has scheduled an insn from the ready list. @var{file} is either a null
7918pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose}
7919is the verbose level provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7920@var{insn} is the instruction that was scheduled. @var{more} is the
7921number of instructions that can be issued in the current cycle. The
7922@samp{MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE} macro is responsible for updating the
7923value of @var{more} (typically by @var{more}--).
7924
dbecbbe4
JL
7925@findex MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7926@item MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7927Define this to the largest integer machine mode which can be used for
7928operations other than load, store and copy operations.
7929
7930You need only define this macro if the target holds values larger than
7931@code{word_mode} in general purpose registers. Most targets should not define
7932this macro.
f89223a9 7933
71d718e0
JM
7934@findex MATH_LIBRARY
7935@item MATH_LIBRARY
7936Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7937in the system math library, or @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7938separate math library.
7939
7940You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"-lm"} is wrong.
512b62fb
JM
7941
7942@findex LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7943@item LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7944Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7945specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7946
7947You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7948is wrong.
e09d24ff
R
7949
7950@findex TARGET_HAS_F_SETLKW
7951@item TARGET_HAS_F_SETLKW
7952Define this macro iff the target supports file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW.
7953Note that this functionality is part of POSIX.
7954Defining @code{TARGET_HAS_F_SETLKW} will enable the test coverage code
7955to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7956if the program has forked.
0c99ec5c
RH
7957
7958@findex MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7959@item MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7960
7961A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7962conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7963@code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
79641 if it does use cc0.
feca2ed3 7965@end table